Bmw 2006 650I Convertible Owners Manual

Bmw-2006-650I-Coupe-Owners-Manual-694378 bmw-2006-650i-coupe-owners-manual-694378

2006 650i Convertible Owner's Manual 2006 650i Convertible Owner's Manual

2006 650i Coupe Owner's Manual 2006 650i Coupe Owner's Manual

: Bmw Bmw-2006-650I-Convertible-Owners-Manual-694379 bmw-2006-650i-convertible-owners-manual-694379 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 236 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Owner's Manual

for Vehicle

The Ultimate

Driving Machine

Contents

A to Z

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

650i

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with

enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore

have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize

yourself with the information that we have compiled for you

before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data

and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use

and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-

tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance

designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-

taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service

life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

© 2005 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts,

only with the written consent of

BMW AG, Munich.

Order No. 01 41 0 159 709

US English VIII/05, 05 09 510

Printed in Germany

Printed on environmentally friendly paper,

bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Contents

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use

the index, refer to page 217.

Using this Owner's Manual

4Notes

Reporting safety defects 7

At a glance

10 Cockpit

16 iDrive

22 Voice command system

Controls

28 Opening and closing

47 Adjustments

56 Transporting children safely

58 Driving

74 Everything under control

85 Technology for comfort, convenience

and safety

96 Lamps

100 Climate

106 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips

114 Things to remember when driving

Navigation

120 Starting navigation system

121 Destination entry

132 Destination guidance

137 What to do if …

Entertainment

140 On/off and tone

144 Radio

153 CD player and CD changer

Communications

162 Telephoning

174 TeleService, BMW Assist

Mobility

182 Refueling

184 Wheels and tires

190 Under the hood

195 Maintenance

197 Replacing components

202 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference

210 Technical data

213 Short commands of the voice command

system

217 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Notes

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

We have made every effort to ensure that you

are able to find what you need in this Owner's

Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way

to find specific topics is to use the detailed

index at the back of the manual. If you wish to

gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will

find this in the first chapter.

Should you want to sell your BMW some day,

please remember to hand over the Owner's

Manual as well; it is an important component of

your vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any other questions, your

BMW center will be glad to advise you at any

time.

You can find information on BMW, e.g. tech-

nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used

Indicates precautions that must be fol-

lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to

the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you

in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively

for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to

help protect the environment.

<Marks the end of a specific item of informa-

tion.

*

Indicates special equipment, country-spe-

cific equipment and optional extras, as well as

equipment and functions not yet available at the

time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to

select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice

command system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the

voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the rel-

evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

5

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The individual vehicle

When purchasing your BMW, you have decided

in favor of a model with individualized equip-

ment and features. This Owner's Manual

describes the entire array of options and equip-

ment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con-

tain information on accessories and equipment

that you have not specified for your own vehicle.

Sections describing options and special equip-

ment are marked by asterisks

*

to assist you in

identifying possible differences between the

descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-

cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in

this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-

panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing

development that is conceived to ensure that

our vehicles continue to embody the highest

quality and safety standards combined with

advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In iso-

lated cases it is possible that the features

described in this Owner's Manual could differ

from those on your vehicle.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Notes

6

For your own safety

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, e.g. the use of

modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-

nance and repair methods. Have corresponding

work on your BMW performed only by your

BMW center or a workshop that works accord-

ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri-

ately trained personnel. If this work is not

carried out properly, there is a danger of subse-

quent damage and related safety hazards.<

California Proposition 65 Warning

California law requires us to issue the following

warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of

automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur-

nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer

and birth defects and reproductive harm. In

addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash

your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always

protect your skin by washing thoroughly with

soap and water.<

Parts and accessories

For your own safety, use genuine parts

and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and

approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,

you simultaneously acquire the assurance that

they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to

ensure optimum performance when installed

on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from

defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage

resulting from installation of parts and accesso-

ries not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other

manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a

BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-

cle, its operation, or its occupants.

Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and

other products approved by BMW, together

with professional advice on using these items,

are available from all BMW centers.

Installation and operation of non-BMW

approved accessories such as alarms, radios,

amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension

components, brake dust shields, telephones,

including operation of any mobile phone from

within the vehicle without using an externally

mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for

instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or

similar accessories, may cause extensive dam-

age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter-

fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect

the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See

your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive

repair establishment or individual using any cer-

tified automotive part.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

7

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication

thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran-

ties:

>New Vehicle Limited Warranty

>Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

>Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

>Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

>California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is

listed in the Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For U.S. customers

The following applies only to vehicles owned

and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury

or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North

America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New

Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831-

1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

a recall and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in individual

problems between you and your dealer or BMW

of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a

safety-related defect to Transport Canada,

Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-

phone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510,

or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Trans-

port Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C,

330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

This overview of buttons, switches and displays

is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also

assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for

operating the various systems.

At a glance

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Cockpit

10

Cockpit

All around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1Convertible: opening and closing rear

window 39

2Convertible: opening and closing windows

together 39

3Convertible: opening and closing back

windows 38

4Opening and closing front windows 38

5Adjusting exterior mirrors 52

Automatic parking function 53

6Turn signals 64

High beams, headlamp flasher 97

High-beam assistant

*

97

Roadside parking lamps 97

Check Control 79

Computer 75

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

11

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

7Buttons on steering wheel

8Instrument cluster 12

11 Ignition lock 58

12 Horn: the entire surface

15 Releasing the hood 190

16 Opening luggage compartment lid 34

Mobile phone

*

162

>Press: accepting and ending

call, starting dialing

*

for

selected phone number and

redialing if no phone number is

selected

>Press longer: redialing

Volume

Activating/deactivating voice

command system

*

22

Changing radio station

Selecting music track

Scrolling in phone book and in lists

with stored phone numbers

Individually programmable

*

54

Individually programmable 54

9Windshield wipers 65

Rain sensor 65

10 Starting/stopping engine and

switching ignition on/off 58

13 Steering wheel heater

*

54

Steering wheel adjustment 53

14 Cruise control 66

Active cruise control

*

67

17 Head-Up Display

*

93

18 Parking lamps 96

Low beams 96

Automatic headlamp control 96

Adaptive Head Light

*

97

19 Instrument lighting 99

Front fog lamps 98

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Cockpit

12

Instrument cluster

1Indicator lamps for turn signals

2Speedometer

3Indicator and warning lamps 13

4Display for active cruise control

*

70

5Tachometer 74

6Engine oil thermometer 75

7Display for

>Time/date 74

>Outside temperature 74

>Indicator and warning lamps 79

>Speed for cruise control 67

>Desired speed for active cruise

control

*

70

8Display for

>Odometer and trip odometer 74

>Computer 75

>Date and remaining distance to be

driven for service requirements 77

>Automatic transmission

with Steptronic

*

62

>SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox

*

61

>Dynamic Driving Control 64

>High-beam assistant

*

97

> Check Control message present 79

9Fuel gauge 75

10 Resetting trip odometer 74

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

13

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in dif-

ferent combinations and colors, both in the dis-

play area 1 and in the display 2

When the engine is started or the ignition is

switched on, some lamps are checked for

proper operation and light up briefly in the pro-

cess.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-

trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator

and warning lamps displayed.

You can consult Check Control for additional

information, e.g. regarding the cause of a mal-

function or the appropriate actions to take, refer

to page 79.

In cases of corresponding urgency, this infor-

mation is immediately displayed when the

associated lamps light up.

Indicator lamps without text messages

The following indicator lamps in the display

area 1 indicate that certain functions are active:

Handbrake set 60

Handbrake for Canadian models

Front fog lamps 98

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

High beams/headlamp flasher 97

Lamp flashes:

DSC or DTC is controlling the drive

and braking forces to maintain vehicle

stability 87

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Cockpit

14

All around the center console: controls and displays

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

15

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

1Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise

function

*

40

2Microphone for handsfree mode for

telephone

*

and voice command system

*

22

Convertible: microphone on steering

column

3Reading lamps 99

4Interior lamps 99

5Coupe: initiating emergency call

*

202

6Indicator/warning lamp for front passenger

airbag

*

92

7Convertible: initiating emergency

call

*

202

8Control Display 16

9Hazard warning flashers

10 Central locking system 32

11 Automatic climate control 100

12 Changing

>radio station 145

>track 140

13 Ejecting

>navigation DVD

*

120

>audio CD 140

14 Player for navigation DVD in Professional

*

navigation system 120

15 Drive for audio CDs 140

16 Switching audio sources on/off and

adjusting volume 141

18 Bracket for cup holder 109

19 Controller 16

Turn, press or move horizontally in four

directions

20 Activating voice command system

*

22

21 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

22 Dynamic Driving Control 64

Temperature setting,

left/right 100

Automatic air distribution and

volume 101

Cooling function 102

AUC Automatic recirculated-air

control 103

Maximum cooling 103

Residual heat mode 103

Switching off automatic climate

control 103

Air volume 102

Defrosting windows and removing

condensation 102

Rear window defroster 100

17 Heated seats 52

PDC Park Distance Control

*

85

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

Convertible: opening the convert-

ible top 42

Convertible: closing the convertible

top 42

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

iDrive

16

iDrive

iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of

switches. This allows these functions to be

operated from a central position. The following

section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of individual functions is

described in connection with the relevant

equipment.

Controls

1Control Display

2 button

Opening the start menu

3Controller

You can use the controller to select menu

items and change settings by:

>moving in four directions, arrow 4

>turning, arrow 5

>pressing, arrow 6

To avoid becoming distracted and unnec-

essarily endangering both your own vehi-

cle's occupants and other road users, never

attempt to use the controls or make entries

unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

17

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Menu overview

Communication

>Telephone

*

>BMW Assist

*

or TeleService

*

Navigation or onboard information

>Navigation system

*

>Onboard info, e.g. for displaying of the

average fuel consumption

Entertainment

>Radio

>CD player and CD changer

*

Climate

>Air distribution

>Automatic program

>Parked car ventilation

menu

>Switching off the Control Display

>Tone and display settings

>Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central

locking system

>Display of the service requirements and

dates for statutory emission and vehicle

inspections

>Settings for the telephone

Basic operation

With the ignition switch at radio readiness or

higher, refer to page 58, the following message

appears on the Control Display:

To confirm the message:

Press the controller.

This opens the start menu.

Start menu

You can call up all the functions of iDrive using

five menu items.

Opening start menu

Press the button.

To open the start menu from the menu:

Press the button twice.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

iDrive

18

Opening menu items of start menu

From the start menu, you can call up the four

menu items Communication, Navigation, Enter-

tainment, and Climate by moving the controller

left, right, forward, or back. Depending on your

selection, the last menu opened will be dis-

played in each case.

You can open the menu by pressing the con-

troller.

Comfort opening of menu items

Convenience opening offers you the option of:

>Opening a menu item of the start menu in

the view last selected

>Direct switching between Communication,

Navigation, Entertainment and Climate

without pressing the button

To do so, move the controller in the corre-

sponding direction and hold it for longer than

approx. 2 seconds.

Displays in menu

1Each menu is divided into fields. The cur-

rently selected field appears brighter.

2A symbol indicates the last selected menu

item of the start menu:

1Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-

tal or vertical lists.

2Arrows indicate the possibility of accessing

other menu items that are not currently vis-

ible.

3Settings are displayed graphically or

numerically.

Communication

Navigation or onboard info

Entertainment

Climate

menu

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

19

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Operating principle at a glance

Basic operation via iDrive is described in this

view.

You can view the individual steps under Set-

tings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to

page 82.

1Selecting a menu item:

>Turn the controller; the marking moves

>Menu items shown in white can be

selected by marking

2Activating a menu item:

>Press the controller

>New menu items are displayed or the

function is carried out

3Selecting a menu item: refer to 1

4Switching between fields:

>Briefly move controller left, right, forward

or back

>Release controller

>Active field appears lighter

5Adjusting settings:

>Turn controller

>Graphic display, numerical value or text

displays can be changed

>Confirmation by changing field

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

iDrive

20

Status information

1Display for:

>Entertainment:

Radio, CD

>Telephone

*

in "Communication":

Name of linked mobile phone, network

search or no network

>"BMW Assist"

*

:

Existing voice connection with a service

from BMW Assist

2Entertainment sound output off

3Display for:

> New entries present in "Missed calls"

*

> Roaming active

4 Telephoning

*

is possible if the mobile

phone is logged onto the vehicle

Reception strength in mobile phone

network depends on mobile phone

5Time

Other displays:

When Check Control information appears or

entries are made via the voice command sys-

tem

*

, the status information is temporarily

hidden.

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the

assistance window:

>the computer or the trip computer

>the arrow display or map view in vehicles

equipped with navigation system

*

>The current position

Selecting displays

1. Move the controller to the right to switch to

the assistance window and press the con-

troller.

2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

21

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Switching assistance window on/off

1. Move the controller to the right to switch to

the assistance window and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the

controller.

To switch on, switch to the assistance window

and press the controller.

Switching Control Display

on/off

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control-

ler.

To switch on, press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Voice command system

22

Voice command system

The concept

The voice command system allows you to con-

trol operation of various vehicle systems with-

out ever removing your hands from the steering

wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display

can be spoken as commands. This frees you of

having to use the controller.

The voice command system transforms your

spoken commands into control signals for the

selected systems and provides support in the

form of instructions or questions.

The voice command system includes a special

microphone.

The microphone is located:

>Near the interior rearview mirror in the

Coupe, refer to page 14

>On the steering column in the Convertible

Prerequisite

In order to enable identification of the com-

mands to be spoken, use iDrive to set the lan-

guage for the voice command system. Setting

iDrive language, refer to page 84.

Symbol in the Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating voice command system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

This symbol on the Control Display and

an acoustic signal indicate that the voice

command system is ready to respond to

commands.

2. Say the command.

The command is displayed on the Control

Display.

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for

word.

{{...}} Indicates the responses of the voice

command system.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

23

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

This symbol appears on the Control Display

when it is possible to input additional com-

mands.

If no other commands are possible, then oper-

ate the equipment using iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice input

Press the button on the steering wheel or in

the center console

or

Commands

Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the system read aloud the possi-

ble commands related to the selected menu

item on the Control Display.

To have the system list the possible com-

mands:

For example, if you have selected "CD", the

system will read aloud the possible commands

for operating the CD player and the CD

changer.

Opening help

Using alternative commands

There are often several commands for running

a function, e.g.:

Running functions directly with short

commands

You can use short commands to carry out cer-

tain functions directly, regardless of which

menu item is selected, refer to page 213.

Opening start menu

An example: selecting a track

1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if

necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

5. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

{Cancel}

{Options}

{Help}

{Settings menu} or {i menu}

{Main menu}

3. {Entertainment}

The system says:

{{Entertainment}}

4. {CD}

The system says:

{{CD player switched on}}

6. Select a track, e.g.:

{Track 1}

The system says:

{{Track 1}}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Voice command system

24

Notes

The mobile phone can also be operated

by voice commands, refer to page 170.<

For voice commands, bear the following in

mind:

>Say the commands and numbers smoothly

and at normal volume, avoiding excessive

emphasis and pauses. This also applies to

spelling when entering the destination.

>Always say the commands in the language

of voice command system.

>When selecting a radio station, use the

usual pronunciation of the station name.

>For entries in the voice-activated phone

book, only use names in the language of the

voice command system and no abbrevia-

tions.

>Keep the doors, windows and glass sun-

roof

*

or convertible top closed to prevent

interference from ambient noise.

>Avoid background noises in the vehicle

while speaking.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

25

Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle.

Its extensive array of features and accessories,

both for driving and for your own safety, comfort

and convenience, are described here.

Controls

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

28

Opening and closing

Keys/remote control

1Remote control with integrated key

2Spare key

3Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-

ment

Remote control with integrated key

Each remote control contains a battery which is

automatically charged in the ignition lock while

driving. You should use the remote control at

least twice a year in order to maintain the

charge condition. For equipment with comfort

access

*

, the remote control contains a replace-

able battery, refer to page 38.

Depending on which remote control is detected

by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-

tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,

refer to Personal Profile, page 29.

Information on the required maintenance is also

stored in the remote control, refer to Service

data in remote control, page 195.

Integrated key

Press the button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

>Hotel function, refer to page 33

>Driver's door, refer to page 32

>Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 34.

New remote controls

To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new

remote controls with an integrated key are

available at your BMW center.

Spare key

Store the spare key in a safe place such as your

wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.

The spare key and integrated key of the remote

control fit the same locks.

Adapter for spare key

The adapter is required so that the vehicle can

be started with the spare key or radio readiness

can be switched on.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

29

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Remove the adapter from the holder in the

glove compartment and slide the spare key into

the adapter.

Personal Profile

The concept

You can set a number of functions of your BMW

individually according to your preferences.

Personal Profile ensures that most of these set-

tings are stored for the remote control currently

in use without you having to do anything. When

the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding

remote control is detected and the settings

stored for it are called up and carried out.

This means that you will always find your BMW

set to your own personal settings even if

another person with his/her own remote control

and settings has used the vehicle since the last

time you drove it. The individual settings are

stored for a maximum of four remote controls.

Personal Profile settings

>When unlocking with the remote control,

either unlock only the driver's door or

unlock the entire vehicle, refer to page 30

>Locking the vehicle after a short time or

after starting to drive, refer to page 32

>Assigning the programmable buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 54

>Display settings for the Control Display:

>Brightness of the Control Display, refer

to page 83

>Units of measure for consumption,

route/distances, temperature and pres-

sure, refer to page 83

>Language on the Control Display, refer

to page 84

>12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 83

>Date format, refer to page 83

>Displaying optical warning for the PDC Park

Distance Control

*

, refer to page 85

>Selection and brightness of the display for

the Head-Up Display

*

, refer to page 94

>Air distribution, temperature in the upper

body region, and intensity for the automatic

climate control, refer to page 101

>Adjusting the voice instructions for the des-

tination guidance of the navigation sys-

tem

*

, refer to page 135

The most recent settings for the following are

also called up during unlocking:

>Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering-

wheel position, refer to page 49

>The volume and tone settings for audio

sources, refer to page 141

>The display of the stored stations for the

radio, refer to page 144

>The volume setting for the telephone, refer

to page 166

Central locking system

The concept

The central locking system is ready for opera-

tion whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system either locks or unlocks all of the fol-

lowing:

>Doors

>Compartment in the front center console

>Luggage compartment lid

>Fuel filler door

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

30

Operating from outside

>via the remote control

>via the door lock

>with comfort access

*

via the door handles

These actions operate the anti-theft system at

the same time. It prevents the doors from being

unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-

dles. The alarm system

is likewise armed/dis-

armed. The interior lamps and the courtesy

lamps

*

are also switched on and off with the

remote control.

You can find more detailed information on the

alarm system

on page 35.

Operating from inside

Via the central locking button, refer to page 32.

The fuel filler door

and the compartment in the

front center console are not locked, refer to

page 32.

In the event of a serious accident, the central

locking system unlocks automatically. The haz-

ard warning flashers and interior lamps are also

switched on.

Opening and closing: from

outside

Using the remote control

Because any persons or animals left unat-

tended in a parked vehicle could lock the

doors from the inside, you should always keep

the remote control with you when you leave the

vehicle; this precaution ensures that you will

remain able to unlock the vehicle from the out-

side at all times.<

Unlocking

You can use the button to unlock the vehicle

depending on the current setting.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-

troller.

7. Select a menu item:

>"All doors"

Press the button once to unlock the

entire vehicle.

>"Driver's door only"

*

Press the button once to unlock only

the driver's door and the fuel filler door.

Press the button twice to unlock the

entire vehicle.

8. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Convenience opening mode

Press the button longer:

>Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass

sunroof

*

is raised and the sliding visor

slides back.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

31

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

>Convertible: the windows and the convert-

ible top are opened.

Watch the convertible top during the

opening process to be sure that no

one is injured. Releasing the button stops

the operation.<

Locking doors

Press the button.

Switching on interior lamps

If the vehicle is locked, press the button.

You can also use this function to locate your

vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode*

You can also trigger the alarm system in case of

danger:

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off alarm: press any button.

Opening luggage compartment lid

Press the button for approx. 1 second.

The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-

less of whether it was previously locked or

unlocked.

A previously locked luggage compart-

ment lid is also locked again after closing.

Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart-

ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure there is

sufficient clearance.<

Setting confirmation signals

You can set confirmation signals to acknowl-

edge the locking and unlocking of the vehicle.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select the desired signal.

7. Press the controller.

The signals are switched on.

Malfunctions

Local radio waves can disrupt the function of

the remote control.

Should the remote control fail to operate owing

to interference of this kind, unlock and lock the

vehicle via the door lock using the key.

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle

using the remote control, then the battery is

discharged. Use this remote control during an

extended drive; this will recharge the battery,

refer to page 28.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is gov-

erned by the following:

FCC ID:

LX8766S

LX8766E

LX8CAS

LX8CAS2

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

>This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

32

>this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or

changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using door lock

When unlocking

1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's

door and the fuel filler door.

2. A second turn of the key unlocks the pas-

senger door and luggage compartment lid.

Convenience operation

You can also use the door lock to operate the

windows and the glass sunroof

*

in the Coupe

or to operate the windows and the top in the

Convertible.

>To open:

With the door closed, turn the key to the

Unlock position and hold it there.

>To close:

With the door closed, turn the key to the

Lock position and hold it there.

Keep a close eye on the closing process

and also on the opening process of the

convertible top to be sure that no one is injured.

Releasing the key stops the operation.<

Manual operation

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can

turn the key all the way to the right or left in the

door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from

inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and

the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti-

vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door

remains unlocked.

You can also make the following settings:

>The central locking system automatically

locks the vehicle after a short time when no

door has been opened.

>The central locking system automatically

locks the vehicle as soon as you start to

drive.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Relock door if not opened"

or "Lock after driving".

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

33

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

7. Press the controller.

The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors

>Either unlock both doors at the same time

with the button for the central locking sys-

tem and then pull the door handle above the

armrest or

>pull the door handle for each door twice: the

first pull unlocks the door, and the second

one opens it.

Locking doors

>Use the central locking button to lock both

of the doors simultaneously, or

>press down the lock button of the desired

door. To prevent you from being locked out,

the open driver's door cannot be locked

using the lock button.

Because any persons or animals left unat-

tended in a parked vehicle could lock the

doors from the inside, you should always keep

the remote control with you when you leave the

vehicle; this precaution ensures that you will

remain able to unlock the vehicle from the out-

side at all times.<

Hotel function

The hotel function locks the compartment in

the front center console and the luggage com-

partment lid separately and disconnects them

from the central locking system. If you hand

over the remote control without the integrated

key, refer to page 28, e.g. at a hotel, then this

prevents access to the luggage compartment

and to the compartment in the front center con-

sole.

Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration,

until the key slot points in the direction of travel

and then remove:

The hotel function is only activated after subse-

quent locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The

system locks the luggage compartment lid and

the compartment in the front center console

and disconnects them from the central locking

system.

Manual release

In order to manually unlock the compartment in

the front center console in the event of an elec-

trical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the

right until it reaches the stop.

If unlocking was manual, the lock must be

returned to the home position, i.e. all the

way back to the left, before reactivation of the

hotel function.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

34

Luggage compartment lid

During opening, the luggage compart-

ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure

there is sufficient clearance.<

Opening from inside

Press the button:

The luggage compartment lid opens, provided

that it is not locked or the hotel function is not

activated, refer to the above section.

Opening from outside

Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or

press the button on the remote control for

approx. 1 second:

the luggage compartment lid opens.

Convertible: if the convertible top is not

completely open or closed, then the lug-

gage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer

to page 42.<

Manual release

The luggage compartment lid lock is located

under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to

page 28, fit the luggage-compartment lid lock.

Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the

luggage compartment lid opens.

If you use the lock to open the luggage

compartment lid while the alarm system

is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent

this, you should deactivate the alarm before-

hand.

If the alarm has been triggered accidentally,

switch off the alarm, refer to page 35.<

Emergency release

Pull lever in luggage compartment. The lug-

gage compartment lid is unlocked.

Closing

Make sure that the closing path of the

luggage compartment lid is clear; other-

wise, injuries may result.

Only drive with the luggage compartment lid

completely closed, otherwise exhaust can pen-

etrate into the passenger compartment.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

35

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the

luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull

down.

If special circumstances should make it abso-

lutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the

luggage compartment lid open:

1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass

sunroof

*

.

Convertible: with the convertible top

closed, close all windows, including the rear

window.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic

climate control to a high level, refer to

page 102.

Luggage compartment

There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners

of the luggage compartment for securing lug-

gage nets

*

or securing straps to fix luggage in

position.

Also refer to Securing cargo, page 117.

Convertible: increasing luggage

compartment capacity

With the convertible top closed, you can

enlarge the luggage compartment capacity.

To do so, unfold the handle and press it down-

ward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow.

This moves the convertible top compartment

floor into the raised position.

Before opening the convertible top, execute

this procedure in reverse order.

The convertible top cannot be opened if

the convertible top compartment floor is

in the raised position.<

Alarm system

The concept

The vehicle alarm system responds:

>To the opening of a door, the hood, or the

luggage compartment lid

>To movements in the vehicle interior: inte-

rior motion sensor, see below

>To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone

attempts to steal the wheels or tow the

vehicle

>To interruptions in battery voltage

Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by

the alarm system:

>by triggering an acoustic alarm

>by switching on

the hazard warning flashers

>by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with

the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm

system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

You can open the luggage compartment lid,

even with the system armed, by using the

button of the remote control, refer to page 31.

When the luggage compartment lid is closed, it

is once again locked and monitored.

Switching off alarm

>Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,

refer to page 30, or

>insert the remote control as far as possible

into the ignition lock, refer to page 58.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

36

Indicator lamp displays

>The indicator lamp below the interior rear-

view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-

tem is armed.

>The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the

doors or luggage compartment lid are not

properly closed. Even if you do not close the

alerted area, the system begins to monitor

the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp

flashes continuously after approx. 10 sec-

onds. However, the interior motion sensor

is not activated.

>After the vehicle is unlocked, the indicator

lamp goes out: no manipulation or

attempted intrusions have been detected in

the period since the system was armed.

>The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking

until the remote control is inserted into the

ignition lock, however for a maximum of

approx. 5 minutes: an attempted entry has

been detected in the period since the sys-

tem was armed.

Tilt alarm sensor

Monitors the inclination of the vehicle. The

alarm system reacts, for example, if someone

attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor

Coupe:

In order for the interior motion sensor to func-

tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof

*

must be completely closed.

Convertible:

Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat

cushions. This means that the alarm system,

including the interior motion sensor, is armed

even if the convertible top is open. Falling

objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms,

refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

may be switched off at the same time. This pre-

vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following

situations:

>In stacking garages

>When transporting on car-carrying trains

>When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote control

once again immediately after locking.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then

flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and

the interior motion sensor are switched off until

the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.

Comfort access*

Comfort access enables you to access your

vehicle without having to hold the remote con-

trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the

remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket

pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the

related remote control in the immediate vicinity

or in the interior.

Comfort access supports the following func-

tions:

>Unlocking/locking vehicle

>Starting engine

>Comfort locking

Functional requirement

>The vehicle can only be unlocked if the

vehicle detects that the remote control car-

ried is located outside the vehicle.

>The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

37

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

>The engine can only be started if the vehicle

detects that the remote control carried is

located in the vehicle.

Special features in contrast to ordinary

remote control

It is basically irrelevant whether you operate the

above-mentioned functions with the comfort

access feature or by pressing the buttons on

the remote control. Before doing so, please

familiarize yourself with the information on

opening and closing, starting on page 28.

The special features when using comfort

access are described below.

Unlocking

Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.

This corresponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control is detected in the interior

after unlocking, the electric steering-wheel lock

disengages, refer to page 58.

Locking doors

Touch the surface, arrow 2 on the driver's door

or 3 on the passenger door with a finger for

approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing

the button.

For comfort closing, hold a finger on the sur-

face, arrow 2 or 3.

If a remote control accidentally left in the

luggage compartment is detected inside

the locked vehicle after the luggage compart-

ment lid has been closed, then the luggage

compartment lid opens again. The hazard warn-

ing flashers flash and an acoustic signal

*

sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness

By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you

switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 58.

When doing so, do not depress the brake

pedal; otherwise, the engine will start

immediately.<

Starting engine

You can start the engine or switch on the igni-

tion if a remote control is located on the interior

of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-

tion lock, refer to page 58.

If you take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a

warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message

appears on the Control Display. As long as no

remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is

only possible to restart the engine within

approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.

Switching off engine with automatic

transmission

The engine can only be switched off in the

selector lever position P, refer to page 60.

To switch off the engine in the selector lever

position N, the remote control must be inserted

in the ignition lock.

Before driving into a car wash with

automatic transmission

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition

lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Place selector lever in position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction

The comfort access function may malfunction

due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then

open or close the vehicle with the buttons on

the remote control or with a key. To start the

engine after this, insert the remote control in the

ignition lock.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

38

Replacing battery

The remote control for comfort access contains

a battery which must be replaced occasionally.

1. Remove integrated key from remote con-

trol, refer to page 28.

2. Remove cover.

3. Insert new battery with positive side facing

upward.

4. Press cover closed.

Return used battery to a recycling collec-

tion point or to your BMW center.<

Windows

To prevent injuries, exercise care when

closing the windows and keep them in

your field of vision until they are shut.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for

example, operate the windows and injure them-

selves.<

Coupe: opening, closing

>Press switch to resistance point:

The window continues to open for as long

as you hold down the switch.

>Press the switch beyond the resistance

point:

The window opens automatically. Pressing

the switch again stops the opening move-

ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner

by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing

To close the side windows while the vehi-

cle is being driven, always close the rear

windows first or all four windows simulta-

neously; otherwise, the windows cannot close

tightly at higher speeds.<

Individually

>Press the switch down to the resistance

point:

The window continues to open for as long

as you hold down the switch.

>Press the switch beyond the resistance

point:

The window opens automatically. Pressing

the switch again stops the opening move-

ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner

by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot

be closed automatically.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

39

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Together

1. Briefly press button 1:

The LEDs in the button 1 and the switch 2

light up for approx. 10 seconds.

2. Press switch 2:

>Down to the resistance point:

All windows, including the rear window,

continue to open as long as you press

the switch.

You can close the windows in the same

manner by pulling the switch.

>Press the switch beyond the resistance

point:

All windows open automatically. Press-

ing the switch again stops the opening

movement.

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the

function. The LEDs go out.

Rear window

1. Briefly press button 1:

The LEDs in the button 1 and the switch 2

light up for approx. 10 seconds.

2. Press switch 2:

>Down to the resistance point:

The rear window continues to open for

as long as you hold down the switch.

You can close the rear window in the

same manner by pulling the switch.

>Press the switch beyond the resistance

point:

The rear window opens automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the

opening movement.

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the

function. The LEDs go out.

The rear window opens and closes auto-

matically when you open or close the con-

vertible top.<

After switching off ignition

You can still operate the windows with the

remote control removed or the ignition

switched off for approx. 1 minute, but in the

Convertible, this is only true as long as no door

has been opened.

For information on using the convenience oper-

ation mode at the door lock or with the remote

control, refer to page 30 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort

access, refer to Locking doors on page 37.

Anti-trapping mechanism

If the closing force rises beyond a predefined

threshold during closing, the system will imme-

diately stop moving the window prior to lower-

ing it slightly.

Convertible: the rear side windows and

rear window are not equipped with an

anti-trapping mechanism.<

Despite the anti-trapping mechanism,

you should inspect the travel path of the

front side window prior to closing it, as the

safety feature could fail to detect certain kinds

of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and

the window would continue closing.

Pulling the switch beyond the resistance point

and holding it limits the response of the anti-

trapping mechanism. In this case, the window

will respond to forces beyond a defined thresh-

old by opening only slightly.

If you pull the switch past the resistance point

again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there,

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

40

the anti-trapping mechanism will be deacti-

vated.<

Accessories in window area

After installing any accessory within the travel

range of the window – such as a clamp-on

antenna for a mobile phone, you will need to

have the system reinitialized for use under the

new conditions. Please contact your BMW cen-

ter for assistance.

Coupe:

Glass sunroof, electric with

raise function*

The glass sunroof and sliding visor are opera-

tional whenever the ignition is switched on.

To prevent injuries, exercise care when

closing the glass sunroof and keep it in

your field of vision until it is shut.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for

example, operate the roof and injure them-

selves.<

Raising and closing glass sunroof

>Briefly press the switch:

The sunroof opens and the sliding visor

moves back approx. 2 in/5 cm

or

press the switch twice past the resistance

point toward the rear:

The sunroof opens and the sliding visor

moves completely back.

>To close, briefly press the switch or push it

twice beyond the resistance point toward

the front:

The sunroof and sliding visor close.

Opening and closing sliding visor

>Push the switch up to the resistance point in

the desired direction:

The sliding visor continues to move for as

long as you hold the switch.

>Push the switch beyond the resistance

point in the desired direction:

The sliding visor moves automatically.

Briefly press the switch again in any direc-

tion to stop the movement.

For information on using the convenience oper-

ation mode at the door lock or with the remote

control, refer to page 30 or 32.

For information on comfort closing with comfort

access, refer to Locking doors on page 37.

Anti-trapping mechanism

If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when

closing, the closing action is interrupted and the

glass sunroof opens.

If the sliding visor encounters resistance when

closing within the last approx. 8 in/20 cm, the

closing action is interrupted and the sliding

visor opens again slightly.

Despite the anti-trapping mechanism,

you should inspect the sunroof's travel

range prior to closing it, as the safety feature

might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-

tions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof

would continue closing.

Pressing the switch beyond the resistance

point and holding it deactivates the anti-

trapping mechanism.<

Following interruptions in electrical

power supply

After an interruption in the power supply the

glass sunroof may not move. The system has to

be initialized. Should this occur, please have the

sunroof initialized at your BMW center.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

41

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Moving manually

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can

move the panorama glass sunroof and the slid-

ing visor manually.

Glass sunroof

1. Remove cover on headliner in front of rear

window. To do so, lift slightly, arrows 1.

Grasp behind the cover, arrows 2 and pull

firmly downward.

2. Insert Allen wrench from onboard tool kit,

refer to page 197, into the opening pro-

vided.

3. Use the Allen wrench to move the glass

sunroof in the desired direction.

Sliding visor

1. Fold the cover downward, if necessary

using the screwdriver from the onboard tool

kit, refer to page 197.

2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the

onboard tool kit into the opening provided.

3. Use the Allen wrench to move the sliding

visor in the desired direction.

Convertible: top

The fully automatic convertible top combines

secure weather protection with simple and con-

venient operation.

Here are a few tips for getting the maximum

pleasure from your Convertible:

>It is advisable to close the convertible top

when the vehicle is parked. The closed con-

vertible top not only protects the passenger

compartment from unforeseen weather

damage, it also provides a certain amount of

protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if

the convertible top is closed, only keep

valuables in the locked luggage compart-

ment.

>Do not attach luggage rack systems to the

convertible top.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

42

In order to avoid damage, do not operate

the convertible top at temperatures

below +147/–106.

Do not leave the convertible top in its storage

compartment for longer than one day when wet;

otherwise, damage from moisture can occur.

Do not place any objects on the convertible top;

otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these

objects could fall off and lead to damage or

injury.

Never move the convertible top when the roll-

over protection system is raised.

Driving without having completed the opening

or closing action can lead to damage or injury.

Do not place hands in the top mechanism dur-

ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil-

dren away from the travel path of the convert-

ible top.

For safety reasons, do not operate the convert-

ible top unless the vehicle is stationary.<

If you have initiated top operation with the

vehicle at a stop and then start to drive,

e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the

initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/

30 km/h:

To do so, press and hold the corresponding

button.<

Partial vacuums that occur at higher

speeds in the passenger compartment

can make the convertible top flap. Use the auto-

matic climate control to increase the air supply

so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not

occur.<

Prior to opening and closing

>Read the safety precautions above carefully

and comply with them fully.

>Make sure that the convertible top com-

partment floor in the luggage compartment

is in the lowered position, refer to page 35;

otherwise, the convertible top cannot be

opened.

>Make sure that the luggage compartment

lid is closed.

Opening and closing

Ignition key in radio ready position or higher,

refer to page 58, with the vehicle stationary:

To avoid putting excessive strain on the

battery, operate the convertible top only

when the engine is running, if possible.

Before closing the convertible top, remove for-

eign objects from the windshield frame, as

these might inhibit closing of the convertible

top.<

1Closing

2LED

3Opening

When the button for operating the con-

vertible top is pressed, the side windows

move downward slightly and the rear window is

lowered completely.

If you hold down the button after the LED 2

goes out, then the windows travel upward

again.

If the convertible top is not completely open or

closed, then the luggage compartment lid can-

not be opened.<

LED

In the following situations, in addition to the

LED, a message is displayed on the Control

Display and an acoustic signal may sound:

>During convertible top operation, the LED

lights up green. It goes out as soon as the

opening or closing action is finished.

>If the LED flashes red when you release the

button, the opening or closing action has

not yet finished.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

43

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

>If the LED lights up red when the button is

pressed, either the floor of the convertible

top storage compartment in the luggage

compartment is in the raised position or a

malfunction has occurred. The convertible

top cannot be moved.

Interruption

The automatic sequence of movements is

interrupted immediately if the button for top

operation is released. The sequence can be

continued in the desired direction by pressing

the appropriate button.

If the opening or closing action is interrupted for

a longer period, the convertible top remains in

that position for approx. 15 minutes before it

slowly moves to a stable position.

A convertible top which is not completely

opened or closed presents a danger.

Do not interrupt and continue the closing action

several times in succession; otherwise, the top

mechanism can be damaged.<

If the convertible top is not completely

open or closed, then the luggage com-

partment lid cannot be opened.<

Convenience operation with the

remote control and via the door lock

Refer to pages 30 and 32.

Manual closing

Only close the convertible top manually if

absolutely necessary; never open it man-

ually. The convertible top compartment lid can-

not be locked in the event of an electrical mal-

function and would open while the vehicle is

being driven.

Improper handling can lead to damage.<

Before closing

1. Open luggage compartment lid.

2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver

from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 197.

3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage com-

partment with the screwdriver and then pull

firmly. This unlocks the convertible top

compartment lid.

4. Close luggage compartment lid.

During manual convertible top opera-

tion, the luggage compartment lid

cannot be opened.<

5. Completely open the side windows and the

rear window.

If the rear window cannot be opened using

the switch, it must be lowered manually.

Opening rear window manually

1. Pry out the cover between the rear head

restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver

as close as possible to the locking ele-

ments, as shown in the illustration.

2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible

into the opening and turn firmly in the direc-

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

44

tion indicated by the arrow until the rear

window is completely open.

Closing

Perform the following work steps with the

assistance of a second person and with

the doors open to prevent injury and damage to

the convertible top.<

1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the

side panel forward. Reach into the resulting

openings and raise the convertible top

compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.

2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and

right side frame, arrow 3.

Lifting the convertible top by parts

other than the side frame can damage

it.<

3. In concert with the other person, pull the

two sides of the convertible top out simulta-

neously and pivot forward. In doing so, keep

the convertible top compartment lid open,

arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.

4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as

they will go, arrow 5, and close the convert-

ible top-compartment lid, arrow 6.

Do not raise the convertible top ends

until after the convertible top has

been swung forward; otherwise, damage

can occur.<

5. Fold the top ends down onto the convert-

ible-top compartment lid.

6. From the interior, take out the cover in the

center of the front top frame; use a screw-

driver if necessary.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

45

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening

provided.

8. From the outside, both persons pull the

front frame of the convertible top down-

ward, as simultaneously as possible on the

two sides.

9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the

arrow until the front convertible top frame is

locked to the windshield frame.

The rear convertible top ends are pressed

automatically onto the convertible top com-

partment lid and close tightly with tension.

10. If necessary, close the rear window again

manually in the same way as above.

Wind deflector*

The wind deflector keeps the air movement in

the passenger compartment to a minimum

when the convertible top is open, thus enabling

pleasant driving even at higher speeds.

The wind deflector is stowed in a protective

sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short

instructions for use are also provided on the

protective sleeve.

Before installing

1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-

tive sleeve and fold it open, refer to

arrows 1.

2. Press the upper and lower section together

until the locking device engages, refer to

arrow 2.

3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.

4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.

Installing

1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflec-

tor into the appropriate opening on the right

side of the vehicle.

2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the recepta-

cles provided.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

46

3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into

the appropriate opening until it snaps into

place.

4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflec-

tor.

With wind deflector fitted: do not incline

the front seat backrests too far backward

if the seat is to be moved back to the end posi-

tion; otherwise, the wind deflector will be dam-

aged.<

Removing

The same as installing, but in reverse order.

Folding up

1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the

wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle

all the way back and release the locking

mechanism.

2. Fold in the upper and lower section.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

47

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Adjustments

Sitting safely

The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-

tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the

interaction with the safety belts, the head

restraints and the airbags, the seat position

plays an important role in an accident. To

ensure that the safety systems operate with

optimum efficiency, we strongly urge you to fol-

low the instructions contained in the following

section.

For additional information on transporting chil-

dren safely, refer to page 56.

Airbags

Always maintain an adequate distance

between yourself and the airbags. Always

hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at

the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini-

mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms

in the event of airbag deployment.

No one and nothing is to come between the air-

bags and the seat occupant.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the

front passenger side as a storage area. Make

sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly

and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument

panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the

knee and front airbags are triggered.

Make sure that occupants do not rest their head

on the side or head airbag; otherwise, injuries

can occur if the airbags are triggered.<

Even if you adhere to all the instructions, the

occurrence of injuries resulting from contact

with airbags cannot be entirely ruled out,

depending on the circumstances. The ignition

and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing

loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This

effect is usually only temporary.

For airbag locations and additional information

on airbags, refer to page 90.

Head restraints

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center

is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an

accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 50.

Safety belt

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts

are being worn at all of the occupied seats.

Airbags complement the safety belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they do not represent a

substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats that are each

equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's

lap.

Expectant mothers should always wear their

safety belts, taking care to position the lap belt

against the lower hips, where it will not exert

pressure against the abdominal area.

Do not route the belt across your neck, or run it

across sharp edges. Be sure that the belt does

not become caught or jammed. Make sure that

the safety belt is securely fastened across the

lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-

sible without it being twisted or tangled. Be sure

not to route it over solid or breakable objects;

otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the

lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdo-

men. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly and pull the shoulder

belt upward periodically to readjust the tension

across your lap in order to avoid a reduction in

the retention effect of the safety belt.<

For instructions on operating safety belts, refer

to page 51.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Adjustments

48

Seats

Note before adjusting

Never attempt to adjust your seat while

operating the vehicle. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement and the

ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

On the front passenger side as well, do not tilt

the backrest too far toward the rear. Failure to

observe this precaution can prevent the belt

from providing effective protection against

injury, as the passenger could slide under the

belt in an accident.<

Also follow the instructions regarding damage

to the safety belt on page 52.

Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted,

do not incline the front seat backrests too

far backward if the seat is to be moved back to

the end position; otherwise, the wind deflector

will be damaged.<

Seat adjustment

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please follow the adjustment instructions on

page 47.<

1Inclination

2Longitudinal direction

3Height

4Backrest

5Convertible: head restraints, refer to

page 50

With the sports seat

*

, you can also adjust the

thigh support manually:

Pull the lever and move the thigh support in the

longitudinal direction.

Lumbar support* adjustment

You can also adjust the contours of the backrest

to obtain additional support in the lumbar

region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-

plementary support to help you maintain a

relaxed, upright sitting position.

>Increase or decrease curvature:

Press front or rear of switch.

>Move curvature up or down:

Press top or bottom of switch.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

49

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory

You can store and select three different adjust-

ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir-

rors and steering wheel.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not

stored in the memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer

to page 58.

2. Adjust the desired seat, exterior mirror and

steering-wheel positions.

3. Press the button:

The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3:

The LED goes out.

Requesting

Do not request a position from the mem-

ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a

risk of accident from unexpected movement of

the seat or steering wheel.<

Convenience mode

1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on radio readiness, refer to page 58.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1,

2 or 3.

The system immediately cancels the adjust-

ment procedure when you briefly press one of

the seat adjustment switches or one of the

memory buttons.

The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel

is immediately interrupted if you operate the

switch for the steering wheel adjustment in any

direction, refer to page 53.

Safety feature

1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition

on or off, refer to page 58.

2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3

and maintain pressure until the adjustment

process has been completed.

If the button was pressed inadvertently:

press the button again; the LED goes out.

Activating with remote control

The last positions of the driver's seat, external

rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored

for the remote key currently in use.

You can choose when the position is requested:

>Request when unlocking vehicle

>Request when opening driver's door

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Adjustments

50

7. Select "After unlocking" or "After door

opened".

8. Press the controller.

To cancel the request:

Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.

When using this feature, always make

sure that the footwell behind the driver's

seat is empty and unobstructed. If you fail to

do so, any persons or objects behind the seat

could be injured or damaged by a rearward

movement of the seat.<

Front head restraints

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center

is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an

accident.<

Coupe

Adjusting height

>To raise: pull the head restraint upward.

>To lower: slide the head restraint down-

ward.

To reach the lowest position, press the

button, refer to arrow 1.<

Adjusting tilt angle

Swivel the head restraints.

Removal

1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the

head restraint.

Installation

Insert head restraint into the sockets and

adjust.

Convertible

Adjusting height

>To raise: move the switch upward.

>To lower: move the switch downward.

Adjusting tilt angle

Swivel the head restraints.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

51

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Getting in back

Before starting to drive, fold backrests

back, otherwise there is the danger of

accident due to an unexpected movement of

the seat.<

Coupe: releasing backrest

Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for-

ward.

The lever is designed so that the safety belt can

be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten

the safety belt more conveniently.

Convertible: releasing backrest

The belt system integrated into the seat makes

it easier to get in back.

1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest for-

ward.

2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has

moved into the desired position.

3. After passengers have gotten in back, fold

the backrest back and lock it in place.

4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has

moved back into its previous position. If you

release button 3 before this, the seat stops

in its current position.

You can lock the backrest in place when it

is folded forward. This is useful, for exam-

ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is

parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi-

bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not

have to use lever 1 to release it.<

Lock backrest warning lamp:

Lights up when the backrest is not

locked. At the same time, an additional

message appears on the Control Display.

Safety belts

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please follow the adjustment instructions on

page 47.<

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts

are being worn at all of the occupied seats.

Airbags complement the safety belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they do not represent a

substitute.

Fastening

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in

the belt buckle.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Adjustments

52

Releasing

1. Hold the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in

the correct position for adults of every build if

the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 48.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat

and passenger seat*

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-

nal sounds. At the same time, an addi-

tional message appears on the Control

Display. Please check whether safety belts are

being worn correctly.

The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds

above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-

vated if objects are placed onto the passenger

seat.

Damage to safety belts

In case of strain due to an accident or

damage, replace the belt system includ-

ing the safety belt tensioners and have the belt

anchor points checked. Have this work carried

out only by a BMW center or a workshop that

works according to BMW repair procedures

with appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise

correct operation of this safety equipment is not

guaranteed.<

Heated seats

The temperature setting advances one step in

its control sequence each time you press the

button. The maximum preselected temperature

is supplied when three LEDs are lit.

To switch off:

Press the button longer.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

The mirror on the passenger's side is

more curved than the driver's mirror.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than

they appear. Do not estimate the distance of

following traffic based what you see in the mir-

rors; otherwise, there is an increased accident

risk.<

1Adjustments

2Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-

matic parking function, refer to Tilting down

passenger-side mirror on page 53

Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-

ror and steering wheel memory on page 49.

Adjusting manually

You can also adjust the mirrors manually by

pressing against the outer edges of their mirror

glass.

Folding exterior mirrors in and out

To prevent the exterior mirrors from being

damaged due to the width of the vehicle,

always fold them in by hand before entering an

automatic car wash.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

53

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Automatic functions

>Both exterior mirrors are automatically

heated when the engine is running or the

ignition is switched on.

>When the vehicle is moving forward, the

interior and exterior mirrors dim as a func-

tion of the incoming light.

The interior mirror is provided with two photo-

cells to control its automatic dimming function.

One is integrated into the mirror glass, refer to

arrow, while the other is located at a position

slightly offset from this on the back of the mirror

housing.

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells

clean and do not cover the area between the

interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Also

do not attach stickers to the windshield in front

of the mirror.

Tilting down passenger-side mirror -

automatic parking function

Activating

1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror

position, arrow 1.

2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever posi-

tion R.

The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat

on the passenger's side. This allows the

driver to see the area immediately adjacent

to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-

ing, etc.

Deactivating

Slide switch into the passenger side mirror

position, arrow 2.

Steering wheel

Adjustments

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the

vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-

dent as the result of unexpected movement.<

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four

directions.

Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to

Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory,

page 49.

Electric steering wheel lock

The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-

cally when the remote control is removed or

inserted, refer to page 58.

Easy entry/exit

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,

the steering wheel temporarily moves into the

uppermost position.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Adjustments

54

Steering wheel heater*

Press the button with the ignition switched on.

The indicator lamp in the button lights up when

the steering wheel heater is switched on.

Programmable buttons* on steering

wheel

You can program the buttons individually.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press

the controller.

A list of various functions is displayed:

>"Navigation voice instructions"

Voice instructions of the navigation sys-

tem

*

>"Air recirculation on / off"

Permanently shutting off outside air,

refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air

control on page 103

>"Mute on / off"

Mutes the audio sources

>"Monitor on / off"

Switches the Control Display on/off

>"Telephone list"

Display/hide phone book or last list of

stored phone numbers displayed

>"Next entertainment source"

Changes audio source

5. Select the desired function and press the

controller.

6. Select the button if necessary and press the

controller.

You can now activate the selected function

using the corresponding button.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

55

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Activating selected function

Press the corresponding button on the steering

wheel.

If you have programmed "Navigation voice

instructions" for one of the buttons:

>To switch voice instructions on/off:

Maintain pressure on the button for several

seconds.

>To repeat the last voice instruction:

Press the button.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Transporting children safely

56

Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger

themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening

the doors.<

In principle, all seats in your BMW are suitable,

with the exception of the driver's seat, for

mounting universal child restraint systems for

all age classes approved for the respective age

group.

Children always in back

Accident research shows that the safest place

for children is in the back.

Children younger than 13 years of age or

under 5 ft/150 cm in height must be trans-

ported in back, seated in child restraint systems

which correspond to the age, weight and height

of the child. Otherwise there is an increased

danger of injury in an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a

safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint

system can no longer be used due to their age,

size and weight.

All rear seat positions in your vehicle comply

with the recommendations of the standard

SAE J1819 for the safe securing of child

restraint systems in motor vehicles.

Exception for front passenger seat

Should it be necessary to use a child-

restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front, knee and side airbag on the pas-

senger side must be deactivated. Otherwise,

there is an increased risk of injury for the child

if the airbags are triggered, even with a child-

restraint system. Your BMW center will be glad

to advise you.<

For more information on automatic deactivation

of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 91.

Installing child-restraint

systems

Follow child-restraint system manufac-

turer's instructions for the selection,

installation and use of child restraint systems.

Otherwise the degree of protection they offer

may be reduced.<

Commercially available child restraint systems

are designed to be secured with a lap belt or

with the lap belt section of a three-point belt.

Incorrectly or improperly installed child restraint

systems can increase the risk of injury for chil-

dren. Always follow the instructions for install-

ing the system exactly.

On front passenger seat

Before installing a child restraint system

in the front passenger seat, make sure

that the front, knee and side airbag on the front

passenger side are deactivated. Otherwise

there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags

are triggered.<

Seat height

Before mounting a universal child-restraint sys-

tem, move the front passenger seat into the

highest position to achieve the best possible

belt routing. Do not change this seat height.

Child seat security

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the

front passenger can be locked against pulling

out to secure child restraint systems.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

57

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Locking safety belt

1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull taut against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking safety belt

1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-

pletely.

Coupe: child restraint system with

tether strap

There are two additional mounting points for

child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer

to arrows.

Placement of tether strap

1. Fold anchor fitting into upright position.

2. Push head restraint downward.

3. Guide tether strap over head restraint and

hook onto anchor fitting.

LATCH child-restraint fixing system

LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-

dren.

To attach a LATCH child's seat, follow the

operating and safety instructions of the

child's seat manufacturer.<

Rear seats

The anchorage points for the LATCH child-

restraint fixing system are located underneath

the identifying symbol. They are not visible from

the outside.

Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull

the belt away from the region of the child-

restraint fixing system.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

58

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control as far as possible into

the ignition lock.

>Radio readiness switches on.

Some electrical devices are ready for oper-

ation.

>The electric steering-wheel lock audibly

disengages.

Before moving the vehicle, insert the

remote control into the ignition lock;

otherwise, the electric steering-wheel lock will

not be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be

steered.<

Removing remote control from ignition

lock

Briefly press in the remote control; it pops out

slightly.

At the same time:

>The ignition is switched off if it was still

switched on.

>The electric steering-wheel lock audibly

engages.

Automatic transmission

The remote control can only be removed when

the selector lever is in position P: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button several

times switches the radio readiness or the igni-

tion on and off.

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button

with the brake or clutch pedal depressed

starts the engine.<

Radio readiness

Some electrical devices are ready for operation.

The time and outside temperature are dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is automatically switched off:

>the moment the remote control is removed

from the ignition lock

>with comfort access

*

by touching the sen-

sitive surface on the door handle, refer to

Locking doors on page 37

Ignition on

Most indicator and warning lamps in the display

area 1 of the instrument cluster, refer to

page 13, light up for different periods.

Radio readiness and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-

ment cluster go out.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

59

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Starting engine

Do not run the engine in closed rooms;

otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause unconsciousness and death.

The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,

an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.

Never leave an unattended vehicle with the

engine running, as such a vehicle represents a

potential safety hazard.

To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always

engage the handbrake and move the selector-

lever into position P or shift into neutral before

leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

When starting the engine, do not press the

accelerator pedal.

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it

running while the vehicle remains stationary.

Instead, begin to drive immediately at a moder-

ate engine speed.

Manual transmission

1. Apply the handbrake.

2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the

idling position.

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag-

ing the starter for a certain period and automat-

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine

starts.

Automatic transmission with

Steptronic*

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag-

ing the starter for a certain period and automat-

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine

starts.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox*

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Move the selector lever into position N and

make sure that this position is also indi-

cated in the instrument cluster.

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

The system responds by automatically engag-

ing the starter for a certain period and automat-

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine

starts.

If the engine fails to start, depress the

brake pedal and press the selector lever

to the right and then back into position N.

Watch the display in the instrument cluster

while doing so.<

Special starting conditions

Depress the accelerator pedal halfway when

starting the engine in the following situations:

>The engine fails to start on the first attempt,

e.g. if it is very hot or cold.

>The engine is started at very low tempera-

tures below approx. +57/–156 and at

high altitudes over approx. 3,300 ft/

1,000 m.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-

sion or repeated start attempts in which

the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is

not burned at all or is burned inadequately and

there is a danger of overheating and damage to

the catalytic converter.<

Switching engine off

Do not remove the remote control from

the ignition lock while the vehicle is roll-

ing; otherwise, the steering wheel lock would

engage while steering.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

remote control with you.

When parking on a downhill slope, apply the

handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle could roll.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

60

Manual transmission

1. Briefly press the Start/Stop button with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Apply the handbrake.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox*

1. Apply the handbrake.

2. Move selector lever into a drive position.

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

If the transmission is in N when the engine is

switched off, you will be given an optical and

acoustic reminder.

Automatic transmission*

1. Move the selector lever into position P with

the vehicle stopped.

2. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

Handbrake

The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent

the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes

the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp

The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-

nal also sounds when starting off. The

handbrake is engaged.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Engaging

The lever engages automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upward, press the button and lower

the lever.

If it becomes necessary under special cir-

cumstances to use the handbrake while

driving, it must not be pulled too sharply. In

doing so, continuously press the button of the

handbrake lever. Otherwise strong application

of the handbrake can lead to overbraking of the

rear axle and associated 'fishtailing' of the vehi-

cle rear end.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-

ing action, occasionally engage the hand-

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming

to a stop if traffic conditions permit.

The brake lamps do not light up when the hand-

brake is engaged.<

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th/6th gear, press the

selector-lever toward the right, otherwise

an inadvertent shift into 3rd or 4th gear could

lead to engine damage.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

61

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Press the gearshift lever to the left, overcoming

a slight resistance.

The backup lamps switch on automatically with

the ignition switched on.

SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox*

The concept

The SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox is an

automated manual transmission in which an

electrohydraulic system handles the clutching

and gear changes.

You operate the SMG using the selector-lever

in the center console and two shift paddles on

the steering wheel.

It offers the following functions:

>Choice of manual or automatic mode:

Sequential mode or Drive mode

>Choice of two drive programs: Normal or

Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving Control

page 64

>Automatic downshifting and protection

against incorrect shifting even in sequential

operation

>Acceleration assistant, refer to page 64.

Selector-lever positions

The current selector-lever position is displayed

in the center console.

>R: Reverse gear

>N: Neutral, idle

>One-touch functions for Sequential mode:

+: manual upshifting

–: manual downshifting

>D: activate/deactivate the Drive mode

The transmission automatically shifts

into N if the driver's door is opened with

the engine running and neither the pedals, the

shift paddles nor the selector-lever are oper-

ated.

This is indicated by an acoustic signal and the

flashing display N in the instrument cluster.<

Gear display

R N 1 to 6

The currently engaged gear is displayed pre-

ceded by a D in Drive mode.

This display is your only way to be sure

the desired selector lever position is actu-

ally engaged.<

Shiftlock

Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;

the shift command will not be executed unless

the brake is applied.

R Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Sequential mode

After every engine start, as soon as the selector

lever is pushed to the right and the brake pedal

is pressed, the Sequential mode is activated.

You can shift up and down using the shifting

paddles or the selector-lever. You do not need

to remove your foot from the accelerator to

do so.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

62

It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g.

in slippery conditions.

In the following situations, SMG does the think-

ing for you:

>Upshifts and downshifts are executed only

when they will result in a plausible combina-

tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for

example, the system will not execute a

downshift that would cause the engine to

overrev.

>When the vehicle is stationary, the trans-

mission automatically downshifts into first

gear.

>Shortly before dropping below a gear-

dependent minimum speed, the transmis-

sion downshifts automatically even without

your intervention.

D Drive mode

In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted

automatically.

To switch from Sequential to Drive mode:

Briefly press the selector-lever to the right

toward D.

Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. passing,

press the accelerator pedal as far down as it will

go. You achieve maximum acceleration.

To switch back to the Sequential mode: press

selector-lever to the right again toward D or

shift using the shifting paddles or the selector-

lever.

Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold

the vehicle on a hill by applying the throt-

tle, but engage the handbrake instead. Other-

wise, overheating can occur in the region of the

transmission.<

Gear changes

Using selector-lever

>To upshift, pull the selector-lever back.

>To downshift, push the selector-lever for-

ward.

Using shift paddles on steering wheel

>To shift up, pull one of the shift paddles.

>To shift down, press.

Automatic transmission with

Steptronic*

In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can

also shift manually with Steptronic, refer to

page 63.

Selector-lever positions

P R N D M/S + –

Displays in instrument cluster

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector-lever position is indicated, and in

manual mode, the gear currently engaged.

Changing selector-lever positions

>Only move the selector-lever from

position P with the engine running: inter-

lock.

>With the vehicle stopped, press the brake

before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the

selector lever is blocked: shiftlock.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

63

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

To prevent the vehicle from creeping

after you select a driving position,

maintain pressure on the brake pedal until

you are ready to start.<

An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts

into selector-lever positions R and P. To cancel

the interlock, press the button on the front of

the selector-lever knob, refer to arrow.

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

The rear wheels are locked.

R Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral

You can select N in car washes, for example.

The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position

Position for normal vehicle operation.

All forward gears are available.

Under normal operating conditions, the fuel

consumption is lowest when driving in posi-

tion D.

Kick-down

The kick-down mode provides maximum accel-

eration:

Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-

throttle resistance point.

Sport program and manual

operation M/S

Move the selector-lever from position D to the

left into shifting slot M/S:

The Sport program is activated and DS appears

in the instrument cluster. This position is rec-

ommended for a performance-oriented driving

style. It is engaged automatically when the

Dynamic Driving Control is activated, refer to

Dynamic Driving Control.

When the selector-lever is briefly moved for-

ward or back, the manual mode is activated and

the Steptronic shifts gear. The instrument clus-

ter shows M1 through M6.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only

when they will result in a plausible combination

of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,

a downshift that would cause the engine to

overrev will not be executed by the system. If

this occurs, the selected gear appears briefly in

the instrument cluster, followed by the current

gear.

To use the automatic function again, move the

selector-lever to the right into position D.

Deactivating selector lever interlock

If the selector lever is blocked in the position P

even though the button on the selector lever is

pressed, the selector lever interlock can be

deactivated:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

64

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard

toolkit, refer to page 197, press the lever at

the point marked in red and move the selec-

tor lever into the desired position.

Dynamic Driving Control

The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible

for your BMW to react in an even more perfor-

mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:

>The engine responds more spontaneously

to accelerator pedal movements.

>Cruise control:

The stored speed is reached more quickly

when requested.

Additionally with SMG:

>Gearshifts are faster.

>The engine speed range is used optimally in

the Drive mode.

With automatic transmission:

>The Sport program is activated.

Activating system

With the ignition switched on, press the SPORT

button.

The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating system

>Press the SPORT button again or

>shift into reverse or

>switch off the engine.

The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru-

ment cluster go out.

Acceleration assistant with SMG

The acceleration assistant enables optimized

vehicle acceleration at race car level on road

surfaces with good adhesion when starting off.

Do not use the acceleration assistant too

often; otherwise, components will wear

prematurely.<

1. Activate the Dynamic Driving Control.

2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 87.

3. Press the accelerator pedal down fully:

Kick-down. The ideal starting-off engine

speed is set.

To maintain the vehicle stability, reacti-

vate DSC afterward.<

Turn signals/

headlamp flasher

1High beams

2Headlamp flasher

3Turn signals

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

65

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Using turn signals

Move the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, only press the lever as

far as the resistance point.

Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator

lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal

lamp.<

Brief signaling

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold

it there as long as you wish to signal.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn

signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and

press the controller.

Triple turn signal is activated.

Wiper system

1Switching on wipers

2Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3Activating/deactivating rain sensor

4Cleaning windshield and headlamps

5Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

Switching on wipers

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-

tion when released.

Standard wiper speed

Press once.

The system reverts to operation in the intermit-

tent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wipe

Briefly press twice or press beyond the resis-

tance point.

The system reverts to operation at normal

speed whenever the vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor

Wiper operation is controlled automatically as a

function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is

located on the windshield, directly in front of the

interior rearview mirror.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

66

Activating rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-

ton lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

Turn the knurled wheel 5.

Deactivating rain sensor

Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes

out.

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash. Failure to

do so could result in damage caused by undes-

ired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps

The system sprays washer fluid against the

windshield and activates the wipers for a brief

period.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched

on, the headlamps are also cleaned at regular

and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washers if there is any

danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do so, your vision could be

obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid

antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use

washers when the washer fluid reservoir is

empty, as this will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles

Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-

cally heated with the engine running or the igni-

tion switched on.

Washer fluid

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.

Always keep it well away from sparks and

open flames, and store it in tightly closed con-

tainers well out of the reach of children. Always

follow the instructions for use provided on the

containers.<

Washer fluid reservoir

Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.

Fill with water and – if required – with a washer

antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-

mendations.

In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix

the washer fluid before filling.<

Cruise control

The concept

Cruise control is available for use at speeds of

approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The vehi-

cle stores and maintains the speed that you set

using the lever mounted on the steering col-

umn.

Do not use the cruise control under driv-

ing conditions that do not permit a con-

stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding

roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions

such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle

and cause an accident.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

67

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

One lever for all functions

1Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

accelerating

2Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

decelerating

3Interrupting cruise control

4Resuming stored speed

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

accelerating

Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:

The system maintains and stores the current

vehicle speed. The display 1 in the speedome-

ter, see below, indicates this regulated speed.

Every time you briefly press the lever, the vehi-

cle speed increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold

it:

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on

the accelerator pedal. The system maintains

and stores your current speed as soon as you

release the lever.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point:

The speed increases by 5 mph/10 km/h.

The vehicle may accelerate beyond the regu-

lated speed on steep downhill stretches where

the engine's braking action alone may not be

sufficient to slow the vehicle. Speed can drop

on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi-

cient.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and

decelerating

Pull the lever, arrow 2:

Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle

speed is reduced.

Interrupting cruise control

Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.

Cruise control is also interrupted automatically:

>when you apply pressure to the brake pedal

>when you depress the clutch pedal or shift

the automatic transmission/SMG into posi-

tion N

>when DSC comes on

Resuming stored speed

Press button 4:

The vehicle accelerates to and maintains the

stored speed.

Deactivating system

When the ignition is switched off, the system is

deactivated and the stored speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

1Stored desired speed

2Selected desired speed appears briefly

Active cruise control*

The concept

With active cruise control, you can select a

desired speed which is not only automatically

maintained when driving on open roadways, but

also varied to maintain a selected distance set-

ting as slower traffic is encountered.

Active cruise control is technologically

advanced over the familiar cruise control and is

a welcome relief from the constant adjustment

of speed that can accompany driving in traffic

on freeways or other high-speed thorough-

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

68

fares. Especially on longer trips, the system can

reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing

your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely

and responsibly.

In addition to maintaining a steady cruising

speed, active cruise control will, within the

scope of given possibilities, adjust your vehi-

cle's speed automatically if you encounter

slower vehicles ahead, thus allowing you to flow

with the traffic without having to make frequent

interventions. For example, if, while cruising at

the selected speed, you begin to approach a

slower vehicle ahead of you in the same lane,

the system will reduce your vehicle's speed to

the same as that of the vehicle ahead to main-

tain your selected distance setting between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. You can

vary the distance, which is also speed-depen-

dent. Based on your selected distance setting,

the system automatically decreases the throttle

setting and lightly applies the brakes if neces-

sary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically

illuminate to signal a following driver to take

action. In addition, it may be necessary for the

vehicle or the driver to downshift, depending on

the kind of transmission your vehicle is

equipped with, to maintain the distance setting

selected. If the vehicle ahead speeds up or

when the lane ahead becomes clear, your vehi-

cle will accelerate to the speed you have

selected by increasing the throttle setting and

shifting gears automatically or with the aid of

the driver as needed. Your selected speed will

be maintained when driving downhill, too.

Active cruise control is not and must not

be used as a collision avoidance/warning

system.<

Since this active cruise control system is

a new technology and operates differ-

ently from conventional cruise control systems

which you may be accustomed to, you are

strongly urged to read all of the pages relating

to this system before use. Pay special attention

to the information contained in the Things to

know about active cruise control section begin-

ning on page 71.<

Professional* navigation system

If there is a navigation DVD in the player, refer to

page 120, then the system adapts the acceler-

ation and deceleration behavior of the vehicle to

the road on which you are currently driving.

The influence exerted by the navigation system

is canceled when the vehicle position is

unknown, e.g. when it has left the mapped

region.

Manual transmission

You can shift gears with the cruise control acti-

vated. If you drive for extended periods at very

high or very low engine speeds, then a shifting

command is issued or the system is deacti-

vated.

SMG

If you drive for extended periods at very high

engine speeds in Sequential mode, then a shift-

ing command is issued or the system is deacti-

vated.

In the Drive mode, the SMG acts similarly to an

automatic transmission in the D position.

Operating active cruise control

1Store and increase desired speed

2Store and decrease desired speed

3Deactivate system, refer to page 70

4Resume stored desired speed and dis-

tance, refer to page 70

5Select following distance to vehicle ahead,

refer to page 69

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

69

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Maintaining current speed

Briefly press lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull,

arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.

20 mph or 30 km/h.

The speed currently being driven is stored and

maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer

and briefly in the instrument cluster.

The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades

if the engine output is insufficient. If the

engine's braking action is not sufficient on a

downhill grade, the system lightly brakes the

vehicle.

Setting desired speed

Adjust your desired speed to the traffic

conditions and remain ready to brake at

all times; otherwise, there is a danger of acci-

dents. The system is unable to compensate for

great differences between your speed and that

of the vehicle ahead, e.g. when quickly

approaching a truck or when another vehicle

swerves into your lane.<

Increasing in steps

Briefly press the lever repeatedly up to the

resistance point or past the resistance point,

arrow 1, until the desired speed is displayed.

>Each time the lever is briefly pressed up to

the resistance point, the desired speed

increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

>Each time the lever is briefly pressed

beyond the resistance point, the desired

speed is increased by a maximum of 5 mph

or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of

110mph or 180km/h is reached.

The speed then displayed is stored and

reached on clear roads.

Increasing without intermediate steps

Press the lever up to the resistance point or

past the resistance point, arrow 1, until the

desired speed is reached.

The speed then displayed is stored and

reached on clear roads.

Decreasing without intermediate steps

Briefly pull the lever repeatedly up to the resis-

tance point or past the resistance point,

arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

>Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis-

tance point, the desired speed decreases

by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

>Each time the lever is pulled beyond the

resistance point, the desired speed is

decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or

10 km/h until the minimum speed of

20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.

The speed then displayed is stored and

reached on clear roads.

Select distance

>Rotary switch downward:

Increase distance

>Rotary switch upward:

Decrease distance

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

70

The selected distance is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Use good judgment to select the appro-

priate following distance given road con-

ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-

ommendations for safe following distance.<

Deactivate system

Press the lever up or down. The displays in the

instrument cluster disappear.

You also deactivate the system when you apply

the brakes, shift very slowly, or shift into neutral.

In addition, the system is deactivated automati-

cally:

>when you activate the DTC Dynamic

Traction Control

>when you deactivate the DSC Dynamic

Stability Control

>when the system does not recognize any

objects for a longer time, e.g. on infre-

quently traveled roads without a shoulder or

guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered

with dirt, refer to page 71

>when the speed is reduced to below

20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic situation

The system deactivates automatically

when the speed is set to below 20 mph/

30 km/h. A signal sounds and a message

appears in the Control Display. The active inter-

vention of the driver is required, otherwise there

is the danger of an accident.<

Resume stored desired speed and

distance

Press button 4.

The displays appear in the instrument cluster.

When you switch off the ignition, the stored

desired speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

1Stored desired speed

2Lights up yellow: vehicle driving ahead is

detected

Flashes red and a signal sounds: the system

cannot establish the distance, you must

apply the brakes

Flashes yellow: driving stability control sys-

tems intervene and the active cruise control

is deactivated

3Selected distance to vehicle driving ahead:

lights up as soon as the system is activated

4Selected desired speed appears briefly

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

This distance is set when the

system is used for the first time

after starting the engine.

Distance 4

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

71

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

If the display ACC --- mph/km/h briefly

appears in the instrument cluster, it might

be that conditions necessary for operation are

not currently being met. To call up Check Con-

trol messages, refer to page 79.<

Warning lamps

The display 2 flashes red and a sig-

nal sounds.

The system is warning you to inter-

vene by braking or executing an

evasive maneuver. The active

cruise control cannot automatically restore the

distance to the vehicle driving ahead.

This display does not, however, relieve the

driver of the responsibility for adapting desired

speed and driving style to traffic conditions.

The display 2 flashes yellow.

Automatic intervention by ABS or

DSC. The active cruise control

intervenes by braking until you

actively take over.

Radar sensor

Heavy rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair the

detection of vehicles ahead. If necessary, clean

the radar sensor under the front bumper. In

doing so, be especially careful when removing

layers of snow and ice.

If the sensor is incorrectly aligned, the active

cruise control cannot be activated.

Things to know about active cruise control

As with conventional cruise control sys-

tems, active cruise control in no way

diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own

personal responsibility, alertness and aware-

ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise

controlling the vehicle. The driver should

decide when to use the system on the basis of

road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.

Active cruise control is intended for use on

highway-type roadways where traffic is moving

relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in

city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush

hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or

roads with sharp curves such as highway off-

ramps; during inclement weather such as snow,

heavy rain or fog; or when entering inter-

changes, service/parking areas or toll booths.

It is also important to regulate your vehicle's

speed and distance setting within applicable

legal limits. Always be ready to take action or

apply the brakes if necessary, especially when

the system is actively following a vehicle in front

of you.<

Always remember that the range and abil-

ity of the system do have physical limita-

tions. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving

72

your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-

cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead

of you, as for example at a traffic light or when

approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system

does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians

or other types of potential traffic such as a rider

on horseback. It is also possible that the system

may not detect smaller moving objects such as

motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert

when encountering any of these situations as

the system will neither automatically brake, nor

provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that

every decrease in the distance setting allows

your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front

of you and requires a heightened amount of

alertness.<

If your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in

front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or

the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehi-

cle will accelerate to the speed you have

selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,

unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle

accelerating.

Be certain to deactivate the system when

you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-

ramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner

on a highway may cause a delay in the system's

reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause

the system to react to a vehicle actually in the

lane next to you. Always be ready to take action

or apply the brakes if necessary.

Active cruise control can only decelerate the

vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If the sys-

tem reduces vehicle speed below 20 mph/

30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is engaged while driving,

the system will automatically deactivate.

Remember, the system cannot stop your

vehicle. In addition, the system is deacti-

vated whenever the driver applies the vehicle

brakes, shifts into neutral, or deactivates DSC.

After any deactivation, the system will no longer

automatically activate the vehicle brakes, which

means the driver must intervene and resume

manual braking. You should then reactivate the

system only when you are fully aware of the

prior speed and distance settings.<

Active cruise control may brake when you

reduce the stored desired speed; however, the

driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter-

vene if necessary.

When you switch off the engine or ignition,

active cruise control is fully switched off, too,

and any settings you have selected are can-

celed.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane

into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-

ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane

ahead of your vehicle.

Behavior in curves

Because of the limited range of the system, it is

possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-

leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-

ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to

the driver to select a speed that is prudent in

view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

73

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active

cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in

the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can

sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not

accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either

case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-

ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driver interventions

Anytime the driver presses down on the

accelerator pedal, any automatic braking

action by the system is interrupted until the

pedal is fully released. After doing this, release

the accelerator and the system again controls

your cruising speed and distance setting. While

driving with the system activated, resting your

foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the sys-

tem not to brake even if necessary. Be certain

that floormats or other objects on the vehicle

floor do not interfere with movement of the

accelerator pedal.<

While active cruise control is capable of

braking your vehicle automatically when

you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is

important to be aware that the ability of the sys-

tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.

when you reduce your desired speed sharply.

The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses

only a portion of braking system capacity and

does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle

braking system. Therefore, the system cannot

decrease your speed for large differences in

speed between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle

traveling at a much lower speed than your own

speed such as approaching a toll booth or when

a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at

close range.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything under control

74

Everything under control

Odometer, outside

temperature display, clock

1Time, outside temperature, and date

2Odometer and trip odometer

3Press button:

>with ignition switched on, trip odometer

is reset

>with the ignition switched off, briefly

display time, outside temperature, and

odometer

With the ignition switch at radio readiness or

higher the outside temperature and the time are

displayed.

To request the date:

Press the CHECK button on the turn signal

lever, refer to page 79.

To set time and date, refer to page 82.

You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the

Control Display, refer to Units of measure on

page 83.

Outside temperature warning

If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal

sounds and a message appears. There is an

increased danger of ice.

Ice can form even at temperatures above

+377/+36. Drive carefully, especially

on bridges and shaded roadways; otherwise,

your risk of accident increases.<

Tachometer

The white-striped advance warning field,

arrow 1, changes depending on the engine

temperature. The segments disappear in

sequence as the engine warms to its normal

operating temperature.

Avoid allowing the engine speed to rise as far as

the advance warning field whenever possible.

It is absolutely crucial to avoid engine speeds in

the red warning field, arrow 2.

In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to

protect the engine.

Coolant temperature

Should the coolant and therefore the engine

become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In

addition, a message appears on the Control

Display.

Checking coolant level, refer to page 193.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

75

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Engine oil temperature gauge

During normal operation, the engine oil temper-

ature is between approx. 1607/706 and

approx. 3407/1706.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-

sage appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 gallons/

70 liters. You can find information on refueling

on page 182.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,

for example when you are driving in mountain-

ous areas, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve

After the reserve quantity has been reached, a

message appears for a short time on the Con-

trol Display; the remaining range is shown in the

onboard computer. Below a range of approx.

30 miles/50 km, the message remains on the

Control Display.

Refuel as soon as possible once your

remaining range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not

ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer

Displays in instrument cluster

To display the information, press the BC button

in the turn signal lever with the ignition switch at

radio readiness or higher.

The following information is displayed in the

specified order:

>Remaining range

>Average speed

>Average fuel consumption

Remaining range

Displays the estimated remaining range avail-

able with the remaining fuel. The range is pro-

jected based on the driving style over the last

20 miles/30 km.

Refuel as soon as possible once your

remaining range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not

ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed

Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine

off are not included in the calculations of aver-

age speed.

To reset the average speed: press the BC but-

ton in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-

onds.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for

the time during which the engine is running.

You can use the Control Display to view your

fuel consumption rate over two different dis-

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything under control

76

tances, refer to Displays on Control Display or

Trip computer.

To reset the average fuel consumption: press

the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx.

2seconds.

Displays on Control Display

You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for

principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open

"Navigation".

In vehicles without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-

troller.

>Estimated time of arrival at destination:

>Entering a distance manually in the com-

puter, see below.

>Entering a destination in the navigation

system

*

, refer to page 121.

>Remaining range

>Distance to destination:

>Entering a distance manually in the com-

puter, see below.

>Entering a destination in the navigation

system

*

, refer to page 121.

>Average speed

>Average fuel consumption

Resetting values

You can reset the values for average speed and

average fuel consumption:

1. Select the desired menu item and press the

controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm.

Entering a distance manually

1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the

controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance

to your destination. If necessary, hold it

against a slight resistance to enter a greater

difference.

3. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The distance is automatically predetermined

during the destination guidance of the naviga-

tion system

*

.

Trip computer

The trip computer is suitable for a vacation trip,

for example.

1. Open start menu.

2. Open "Navigation".

In vehicles without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

77

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-

troller.

>Departure time

>Driving time

>Distance traveled

>Average speed

>Average fuel consumption

Switching trip computer on/off and resetting

all values:

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item and press the

controller.

Display options

You can display the computer or the trip com-

puter in the assistance window.

1. Move the controller to the right to switch to

the assistance window and press the con-

troller.

2. Select a menu item:

>"Onboard info"

>"Trip computer".

3. Press the controller.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date for

the next maintenance are displayed briefly with

the ignition switched on.

Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-

mine your vehicle's current service

requirements by reading out the data stored in

the remote control.<

Additional information

You can view more detailed information by

using the Control Display, principle details, refer

to page 16.

1. Open start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything under control

78

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

The display shows a list of selected service and

maintenance procedures, as well as legally

mandated official inspections.

You can request more detailed information on

every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or an official

inspection is approaching. Please

arrange a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering dates for state emission and

vehicle inspections*

Make sure the date on the Control Display is

always set correctly, refer to page 83; other-

wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based

Service is not ensured.

1. Open start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

6. Select "Emission inspect." or "State

inspection" and press the controller.

7. Select "Set service date" and press the

controller. The month is highlighted.

8. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

79

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

9. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The year is highlighted.

10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

11. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control monitors functions in the

vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-

function in the monitored systems. A Check

Control message of this kind includes indicator

or warning lamps in the instrument cluster, pos-

sibly an acoustic signal, and text messages at

the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in dif-

ferent combinations and colors, both in the dis-

play area 1 and in the display 2

This symbol means that a Check Control

message has been generated. The symbol

remains visible even if the Check Control

message has been hidden after a short time.

The combinations of warning lamps and text

messages are stored and can be viewed later,

also refer to page 80.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-

trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator

and warning lamps displayed.

You can display supplementary information

regarding most Check Control messages, e.g.

as to the cause of a malfunction and corre-

sponding actions to be taken, see below.

In cases of corresponding urgency, this infor-

mation is immediately displayed when the

associated lamps light up.

To exit the displayed information:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Importance of Check Control

messages

Important Check Control messages are

retained until the malfunctions have been recti-

fied. They cannot be deleted. If a number of

these malfunctions occur simultaneously, they

are displayed in succession.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything under control

80

Less important messages disappear after

approx. 20 seconds, but remain in memory.

To hide these Check Control messages:

Press the CHECK button on the turn signal

lever.

Displaying stored Check Control

messages

1. Press the button longer:

The first stored message is displayed.

2. Press the button:

A new message appears each time you

press the button.

Displaying supplementary information

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Check Control messages" and

press the controller.

5. Select a message and press the controller.

To exit from the menu immediately:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying the urgency of malfunctions

Depending on the equipment, the stored Check

Control messages are also displayed with the

following symbols:

No malfunctions detected in the moni-

tored systems.

Malfunctions detected in the monitored

systems. Depending on the malfunction,

supplementary information is shown on

the Control Display.

The symbols also indicate the status of the ser-

vice requirements display, refer to page 77.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

81

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Displays after completion of trip

Malfunction reports generated during the trip

are shown consecutively when you switch off

the ignition.

Before the display disappears, you can display

the messages once again. Press the CHECK

button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes-

sages are present, you can press the CHECK

button repeatedly.

The display:

>turns off automatically after a brief period

>can be turned off at any time by pressing

the CHECK button again for approx. 2 sec-

onds

Speed limit

You can enter a speed and a Check Control

message indicates when you have reached

this speed. This enables you, for example, to

receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in

an urban area.

You are only warned of reaching this speed a

second time if your vehicle has fallen at least

3 mph/5 km/h below it in the meantime.

Displaying, setting or changing limit

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open start menu.

2. Open "Navigation".

In vehicles without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

5. Select the speed value and press the con-

troller.

6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If neces-

sary, hold it against a slight resistance to

enter a greater difference.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The limit is automatically switched on.

Applying your current speed as limit

Select "Select current speed" and press the

controller. The system applies your current

speed as the limit.

Activating limit

Select "On" and press the controller.

The limit is automatically switched on.

Stopwatch

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open start menu.

2. Open "Navigation".

In vehicles without navigation system

*

:

Open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-

ler.

Starting, stopping, or resetting

>Select "Start" and press the controller.

The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

>Select "Reset" and press the controller.

The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it

was running beforehand.

>Select "Stop" and press the controller.

This stops the timer.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything under control

82

Taking an intermediate time reading

Select "Interim time" and press the controller.

The interim time appears below the ongoing

primary stopwatch count.

All of the remaining functions remain

available at all times while the stopwatch

is running. The stopwatch continues to operate

in the background.<

Settings on Control Display

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button once or twice until

the start menu appears.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"

is selected and press the controller.

Setting time

1. Move the controller once to the front if nec-

essary to change to the first field from the

top.

2. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected

and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller until "Set time" is

selected and press the controller.

Making settings

1. Turn the controller to set the hours and

press the controller.

2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and

press the controller.

The changed time is stored.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

83

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Activating hour signal*

You will hear three tones just before each full

hour.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.

The hour signal is activated.

Setting time format

1. Select "Time format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the

controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Setting date

1. Select "Date" and press the controller.

2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.

The first section of the date display is high-

lighted, in this case the month

3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

4. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The next adjustment is highlighted.

5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the

last adjustment, the date is stored.

Changing date format

1. Select "Date format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the

controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Brightness of Control Display

The brightness is automatically adapted to the

ambient lighting conditions. However, you can

change the base setting.

1. Select "Brightness" and press the control-

ler.

2. If necessary, move the controller to the right

to select "Display".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Units of measure

You can change the units of measure for fuel

consumption, distances, temperature and

pressure.

1. Select "Units" and press the controller.

2. Select the menu item to be set.

3. Press the controller.

4. Select the desired unit of measure and

press the controller.

The settings are stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything under control

84

Language on Control Display

1. Select "Languages" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select "Text language" and press the con-

troller. You can select a different language

for the text displays.

3. Select the desired language and press the

controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

85

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Technology for comfort, convenience and

safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The concept

The PDC assists you when you are parking.

Acoustic signals and an optical display

*

alert

you to the approach of an object from behind

your vehicle. To measure the distance, there

are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.

The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.

But an acoustic warning first sounds at approx.

24 in/60 cm for the sensors at the front and two

rear corners and at approx. 5 ft/1,50 m for the

center rear sensors.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate the

presence of objects when they are being

approached slowly, as is usually the case when

parking. Avoid approaching an object at high

speed; otherwise, the physical circumstances

could cause the system warning to be activated

too late.<

Automatically activating

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on, the system starts to operate automatically

approx. 1 second after you shift into reverse.

Wait this short period before driving.

Switching on manually

Press the button; the LED lights up.

Switching off manually

Press the button again; the LED goes out.

After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over

approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is

switched off and the LED goes out. You can

reactivate the system manually as needed.

Signal tones

An intermittent signal indicates the distance of

the vehicle from an object being approached.

Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the

vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from

the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance

between vehicle and object decreases, the

intervals between the tones become shorter.

The signal tone becomes continuous once the

distance to the nearest object falls to below

roughly 1 ft/30 cm.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.

3seconds:

>if you remain in front of an object that was

only detected by one of the corner sensors

>if you drive parallel to a wall

Malfunction

The LED in the button flashes and a message

appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-

functioning. Have the system checked.

As a preventive measure, keep the sensors

clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure

that they will continue to operate effectively. Do

not spray the sensors with high-pressure wash-

ers for prolonged intervals and always keep the

nozzle at least 4 in/10 cm from the sensors.

PDC with visual warning*

You can also enjoy the option of having the sys-

tem show the approach to an object on the

Control Display. Objects that are farther away

are already shown there before a signal tone

sounds.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

86

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "PDC" and press the controller.

5. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-

troller.

The PDC screen is activated.

The display appears on the Control Display as

soon as PDC is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

System limits

Even with PDC, final responsibility for

estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstacles always remains with

the driver. Even when sensors are involved,

there is a blind spot in which objects cannot be

detected. This applies especially in those cases

where the system approaches the physical con-

straints of ultrasonic measurement, as occurs

with tow bars and trailer couplings, and in the

vicinity of thin or wedge-shaped objects. Low

objects already displayed, e.g. a curb, can dis-

appear from the detection area of the sensors

again before a continuous tone sounds. Higher,

protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be

detected. Loud noises from outside and inside

the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the

PDC signal tone.<

Driving stability control

systems

Your BMW is equipped with an extended array

of systems designed to enhance and maintain

vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System

ABS prevents the wheels from locking during

braking. Safe steering response is maintained

even during hard braking. This increases active

driving safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the

engine. For information on safe braking, refer to

page 115.

CBC Cornering Brake Control

This system provides further enhancements to

vehicle stability and steering response when

braking while cornering or when braking during

a lane change.

Electronic brake-force distribution

This system controls the brake system's appli-

cation pressure at the rear wheels to ensure

stable deceleration.

DBC Dynamic Brake Control

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system

automatically produces the maximum braking

force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-

est possible braking distance during full brak-

ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-

vided by ABS.

Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal for

the duration of the braking maneuver. DBC is

switched off when the brake pedal is released.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels

when starting off and accelerating. DSC also

detects unstable driving conditions such as

fishtailing or sliding of the vehicle's front

wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle

safely stay on course within the physical limits

by reducing the engine output and by applying

the brakes differently in the individual wheels.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

87

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The DSC is operational every time you start the

engine.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed,

even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the

driver. Do not reduce the additional safety mar-

gin of the system by taking risks.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up, but not for

longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic

Traction Control and DSC are deactivated

together. Interventions promoting stability and

forward momentum will no longer be carried

out. The stability-promoting intervention of the

active steering

*

is also deactivated, refer to

page 90.

A message appears on the Control Display.

Please note any supplementary information

that appears there.

To support enhanced operating stability, reacti-

vate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC

Press the button; the indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out.

For better control

The indicator lamp flashes:

DSC is controlling the drive forces and

brake forces.

The indicator lamp comes on:

DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

DTC is a variant of DSC for special road condi-

tions, e.g. uncleared snow-covered roads, that

is optimized for forward momentum. The sys-

tem ensures maximum forward momentum, but

with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive

with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC

under the following special circumstances:

>When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or

on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

>When rocking a stuck vehicle free or when

starting off in deep snow or on loose ground

>When driving with snow chains

*

Activating DTC

Press the button; the DTC indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp

in the instrument cluster goes out.

For better control

The indicator lamp flashes:

DSC is controlling the drive forces and

brake forces.

The indicator lamp comes on:

DTC is activated.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

88

Dynamic Drive*

The concept

Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti-

mizes vehicle stability during cornering and

evasive maneuvers.

Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on

the front and rear axles. Suspension compli-

ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying

from performance-oriented during cornering to

smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle

is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle

operation, the system continuously runs

through closed-loop control cycles lasting only

fractions of a second.

The system assumes operational status each

time you start the engine.

Malfunction

The warning lamp lights up yellow and

a message is shown on the Control Dis-

play. There is a malfunction in the sys-

tem. Have the system checked as soon as pos-

sible.

If a malfunction occurs, please remember

to adapt your speed accordingly, espe-

cially in curves.

The suspension will be noticeably softer and

the vehicle will display a greater tendency to tilt

during cornering and in crosswinds.

If a message stating that you should stop is

shown on the Control Display, stop at a suitable

location and switch off the engine as soon as

possible. In this case the oil level in the reservoir

may have dropped below the minimum, possi-

bly owing to a leak in the hydraulic system. Do

not continue driving, but instead contact your

BMW center.<

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept

The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the infla-

tion pressures in the tires as you drive. The sys-

tem provides an alert whenever the inflation

pressure drops significantly in relation to the

pressure in another tire.

In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius

and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels

change. This change is detected and signaled

as a flat tire.

Functional requirement

To ensure the reliable signaling of a flat tire, the

system must be initialized at the correct tire

inflation pressure.

The initialization must be repeated after

every correction of the tire inflation pres-

sure and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits

The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate

sudden severe tire damage caused by

outside factors and does not detect a natural,

even pressure drop in all four tires.<

In the following situations, the system could be

delayed or malfunction:

>System has not been initialized

>Driving on snow-covered or slippery roads

>Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration

>Driving with snow chains

*

Initializing system

The initialization finishes during driving,

which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is auto-

matically continued.

Do not initialize the system when driving with

snow chains

*

.<

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

89

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "FTM" and press the controller.

5. Start engine, but do not start driving.

6. Select "Set tire pressure" and press the

controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

8. Start driving.

The message "Initializing..." is displayed.

The initialization is completed during driving.

Then the message "Status: FTM active"

appears on the Control Display again.

Indication of a flat tire

The warning lamp lights up in red. A

message appears on the Control Dis-

play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation

pressure loss.

1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to

below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden brak-

ing and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed

a vehicle speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer

equipped with run-flat tires, as it was

when it came from the factory, refer to

page 188. Continued driving after a flat tire

can result in serious accidents.<

2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. The system

must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,

0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible

distance for continued driving on run-flat

tires, based on the following guide values:

>With low load:

1 to 2 persons without luggage:

approx. 155 miles/250 km.

>With medium load:

2 persons, luggage compartment full, or

4 persons without luggage:

approx. 94 miles/150 km.

>With full load:

4 persons, luggage compartment full:

approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Drive reservedly and do not exceed

a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the

event of pressure loss, vehicle handling

changes. This includes reduced tracking

stability in braking, extended braking dis-

tances and altered natural steering charac-

teristics.

If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur

while the vehicle is being driven, this can

indicate final failure of the damaged tire.

Reduce speed and stop at a suitable loca-

tion as soon as possible; otherwise, pieces

of the tire could become detached and

cause an accident. Do not continue driving,

but instead contact your BMW center.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

90

Active steering*

The concept

The active steering is a system that actively var-

ies the steering angle of the front wheels in rela-

tion to the steering wheel movements.

At low speeds, e.g. in a town or when parking,

the steering angle of the wheels is increased,

i.e. the steering becomes very direct.

In the higher speed range, on the other hand,

the steering angle is reduced more and more.

This improves the handling capability of your

BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar-

geted corrections to the steering angle pro-

vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle

before the driver intervenes. This stability-pro-

moting intervention is deactivated when DSC is

switched off, refer to page 86.

Malfunction

The warning lamp lights up and a mes-

sage appears on the Control Display.

The active steering is no longer operational. At

low speed, larger steering wheel movements

are required, while the vehicle reacts more sen-

sitively to steering wheel movements in the

higher road speed range. The stability-promot-

ing intervention can also be deactivated. Pro-

ceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the

system checked.

Brake force display

>Left-hand picture: normal braking.

>Right-hand picture: heavy braking.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the

marked covers:

1Front airbags

2Coupe: head airbags

3Side airbags

4Knee airbag

5Knee airbag

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

91

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Protective action

To ensure that the safety systems con-

tinue to provide optimized protection,

please follow the adjustment instructions on

page 47.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and

front passenger by responding to frontal

impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-

vide adequate restraint. When needed, the

head and side airbags help provide protection in

the event of a side impact. The relevant side air-

bag supports the side upper body area. The

head airbag supports the head. The knee airbag

protects the legs from colliding with the cockpit.

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in

every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-

dents or rear-end collisions.

For details on the correct seat position, refer to

page 47.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the

cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way.

Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention

system from the vehicle. Do not modify or

tamper with either the wiring or the individual

components in the airbag system.This category

includes the upholstery in the center of the

steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the

side trim panels on the doors and on the Coupe,

the roof pillars along with the sides of the head-

liner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the

steering wheel.

Do not touch the individual components

directly after the system has been triggered,

because there is a danger of burns.

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or

triggering of the airbag restraint system, have

the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-

bag generators carried out only by a BMW cen-

ter or a workshop that works according to BMW

repair procedures with appropriately trained

personnel and has the required explosives

licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service

the system could lead to failure in an emer-

gency or undesired airbag activation, either of

which could result in personal injury.<

Warnings and information on the airbags are

also provided on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of front

passenger airbags

The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-

uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-

face of the front passenger seat. The system

correspondingly activates or deactivates the

front, knee and side airbag on the front passen-

ger side.

The current status of the front passenger

airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is

indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior

rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front

passenger airbags below.<

Before transporting a child in the front

passenger seat, read the safety informa-

tion and follow the instructions under Trans-

porting children safely, refer to page 56.

The front, knee and side airbag on the front pas-

senger side can be deactivated for teenagers

and adults in certain seat positions; the indica-

tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights

up when this occurs. In these cases, change the

seat position so that the front passenger air-

bags are activated and the indicator lamp goes

out. If the desired status cannot be produced by

changing the seat position, transport the corre-

sponding person in the rear seat.

Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding,

beaded mats or other items onto the front pas-

senger seat unless they are specifically recom-

mended by BMW. Do not place objects under

the seat which could press against the seat

from below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of

the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

92

Operating state of front passenger

airbags

The illustration here shows a possible arrange-

ment in the Coupe. With some vehicle equip-

ment packages or in the Convertible, the

arrangement of the switches and indicator

lamps may differ somewhat.

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-

bags indicates the operating status of the front,

knee and side airbag on the front passenger

side depending on whether the seat is occu-

pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the

front passenger airbags are activated or deacti-

vated.

>The indicator lamp lights up when a child in

a child restraint system intended for the

purpose is properly detected on the seat.

The front, knee and side airbag on the front

passenger side are deactivated.

>The indicator lamp does not light up when,

for example, a correctly seated person of

sufficient height is detected on the seat.

The front, knee and side airbag on the front

passenger side are activated.

>The indicator lamp does not light up when

the seat is empty.

But the front, knee and side airbag on the

front passenger side are still deactivated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

With the ignition lock at radio readiness or

higher, refer to page 58, the warning lamp lights

up briefly, indicating the operational readiness

of the entire airbag system and the safety belt

tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction

>Warning lamp does not light up as of radio

readiness.

>Warning lamp lights up continuously.

Have the airbag system checked immedi-

ately in case of a malfunction; otherwise,

there is a danger that the airbag system may not

respond in the expected manner in an accident

despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

Convertible: rollover

protection system

The rollover protection system is automatically

activated in the event of an accident or a critical

driving situation, extreme inclination on the lon-

gitudinal or transverse axis, or loss of ground

contact. The rollover bars located behind the

rear head restraints are deployed within frac-

tions of a second.

As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated

into the windshield frame, the rollover protec-

tion system ensures that all vehicle occupants

have the necessary headroom.

Always keep the path of movement of the

rollover protection system clear.

In less severe accidents, you are protected by

the fastened safety belt and, depending on the

severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and

the multistage airbag restraint system.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

93

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Lowering

If the rollover protection system experienced no

impact after automatic activation, then it can be

lowered again. No tools are necessary for this

purpose.

1. Press the release backward and hold in that

position.

2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway

down from above.

3. Let go of the release.

4. Press the rollover protection unit down until

it snaps into place.

5. Use the same procedure for the second roll-

over protection unit.

Have the rollover protection system checked

after unexpected triggering.

Never move the convertible top when the

rollover protection system is raised.

No changes of any nature may be made to the

individual components of the rollover protec-

tion system and wiring.

Work on the rollover protection system may

only be performed at a BMW center.

Unprofessional attempts to service the system

can lead to failure or malfunction.

For a system check and to ensure long-term

functioning, you must comply with the mainte-

nance intervals of the service requirements,

refer to page 77.<

Head-Up Display*

The concept

With the Head-Up Display, important informa-

tion is projected into the driver's field of view,

e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to

absorb this information without looking away

from the road.

Switching on/off

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on:

Press the button to activate or deactivate this

system.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

94

1Navigation instructions

2Display

>Cruise control

>Active cruise control

3Speed

Selecting displays

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Head-Up Display" and press the

controller.

5. Select desired information of Head-Up

Display.

6. Press the controller.

The information appears on the Head-

Up Display.

The settings are stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Adjusting brightness

The brightness of the display is automatically

adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.

However, you can change the base setting.

With the low beams switched on, the brightness

can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of

the instrument lighting.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Brightness" and press the control-

ler.

5. If necessary, move the controller to the left

to select "Head-Up Display".

6. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Notes

The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up

Display is influenced by:

>Sunglasses with certain polarization filters

>Certain sitting positions

>Objects on the cover of the Head-Up

Display

>Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting

conditions

If the image is distorted, please have the base

setting checked at a BMW center.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

95

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Specialized windshield

The windshield is a part of the system. The

shape of the windshield complies with the

requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable

a precise display. A film in the windshield pre-

vents double images from being displayed.

Have the windshield replaced only by a BMW

center or a repair shop that works in accordance

with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately

trained personnel.

Care instructions

You can find everything you need to know on

this topic by consulting the Caring for your vehi-

cle brochure.

To avoid damaging the cover of the Head-

Up Display, use only a soft, nonabrasive

cloth to clean it.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Lamps

96

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

1Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive

Head Light

*

and high-beam assistant

*

2Parking lamps

3Low beams/daytime driving lamps

*

Parking lamps

In the switch position 2, the front, rear and side

vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the

parking lamps for parking. For lighting on one

side for parking as an additional feature, refer to

page 97.

The parking lamps drain the battery.

Avoid using for longer periods; otherwise,

it may not be possible to start the engine.<

Low beams

The low beams light up in switch position 3 only

with the engine running. Otherwise the parking

lamps are lit.

Pathway lighting

When you activate the headlamp flasher after

parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,

the low beams will come on for a brief period.

You can set the duration via iDrive or deactivate

the function.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the

controller.

6. Turn the controller to select the corre-

sponding duration.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

Daytime driving lamps*

If you wish, you can leave the light switch in

position 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if required as

described under Parking lamps.

Automatic headlamp control

In switch position 1, the low beams are auto-

matically switched on or off depending on the

ambient light, e.g. in a tunnel, at dawn/dusk in

the rain or snow, and the Adaptive Head Light

*

is active. The LED next to the symbol is illumi-

nated when the low beams are on.

The low beams remain on independent of

the ambient lighting conditions when you

switch on the fog lamps.

With the daytime driving lamps activated, the

low beams are always switched on whenever

the ignition is switched on.<

The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps

should be switched on in response to ambient

lighting conditions. For example, the system

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

97

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

cannot detect fog. To avoid safety risks, you

should always switch on the lamps manually

under these conditions.<

Adaptive Head Light*

The concept

Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp

control system that enables better illumination

of the road surface. Depending on the steering

angle and other parameters, the light from the

headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Head Light

In switch position 1, the Adaptive Head Light is

active and the automatic headlamp control is

switched on.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive

Head Light is not active when driving in reverse

and points toward the passenger side when the

vehicle is stopped.

Malfunction

The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-

lamp control flashes. The Adaptive Head Light

is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system

checked as soon as possible.

High beams/

roadside parking lamps

1High beams

2Headlamp flasher

3Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*

You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one

side of your vehicle when parking. When using

this function, comply with national regulations:

After parking the vehicle, press the lever in the

desired direction 3, past the resistance point.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-

tery. Avoid using for longer periods; oth-

erwise, it may not be possible to start the

engine.<

High-beam assistant*

The concept

This system automatically switches the high

beams on and off again. A sensor on the front of

the interior rearview mirror controls the pro-

cess. The assistant ensures that the high

beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit-

uation allows. This reduces the strain on you

while at the same time providing you with the

best possible visibility. Of course, you can inter-

vene at any time and switch the high beams on

and off in the accustomed manner.

Activating high-beam assistant

1. Turn the light switch to switch position 1,

refer to page 96.

2. Press the turn signal lever in the high beam

direction with the low beams switched on.

The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the high-beam

assistant is activated. The assistant

automatically switches between high and low

beams, reacting to oncoming traffic and traffic

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Lamps

98

ahead and to well-lit areas such as towns and

cities.

Manually switching between high and

low beams

You can intervene at any time if you wish or the

situation requires.

>If the high-beam assistant has switched on

the high beams, but you want to use the low

beams, simply switch to the low beams with

the turn signal lever. This also deactivates

the high-beam assistant.

To reactivate the system, briefly press the

turn signal lever in the high beam direction

again.

>If the high-beam assistant has switched on

the low beams, but you want to use the high

beams, switch to the high beams in the

accustomed manner. The system is deacti-

vated in the process and you must switch to

the low beams manually.

To reactivate the system, briefly press the

turn signal lever in the high beam direction

again.

>You use the headlamp flasher in the usual

way when the low beams are on.

System limits

The high-beam assistant cannot replace

personal decisions about the benefits of

using high beams. In situations that require

them, you should switch to the low beams man-

ually to avoid a safety risk.<

In the following sample situations, the system

either does not function or functions only in a

limited way and a personal reaction may be

required:

>Under extremely unfavorable weather con-

ditions, such as heavy fog or precipitation

>To make out poorly-lit road users such as

pedestrians, cyclists, people on horseback,

horse-drawn vehicles, train or ship traffic

close to the road and wild animals crossing

the road

>In tight curves, on steep hilltops or in

depressions, with cross traffic or partially

concealed oncoming traffic on the freeway

>In poorly lit places and with highly reflective

signs

>In the low speed range

>When the windshield is fogged up, dirty or

covered with stickers, decals, etc. in the

area of the interior rearview mirror

>When the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor

on the front side of the interior rearview mir-

ror with a cloth moistened with a small

amount of glass cleaner.

Front fog lamps

The parking lamps or low beams must

be switched on for the fog lamps to

operate. The green indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up when the fog

lamps are switched on.

The fog lamps are switched off whenever the

high beams are switched on.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti-

vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

99

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Instrument lighting

The lighting intensity can be adjusted with the

knurled wheel.

Interior lamps

Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,

door entry lighting, courtesy lamps

*

and sill

panel lighting

*

is automatic.

Switching the interior lamps on and off

manually

Press button 1.

If you want the interior lamps to remain off con-

tinuously, maintain pressure on the button for

approx. 3 seconds.

To revert to normal operation, briefly press the

button.

Reading lamps

The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp:

You can turn them on and off using the but-

tons 2 located next to the lamps.

To protect the battery, all lamps in the

vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-

utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer

to Start/Stop button on page 58.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Climate

100

Climate

Automatic climate control

1Airflow directed toward the windshield

and side windows

2Air for the upper body area, refer to

Ventilation on page 103

3Air to footwell

4Temperature, left side of passenger

compartment

5Maximum cooling

6Defrosting windows and removing

condensation

7Air volume, manual

8Switching off automatic climate control

9Switching cooling function on and off

manually

10 Temperature, right side of passenger

compartment

11 Residual heat mode

12 AUTO program

13 AUC automatic recirculated-air control/

recirculated air mode

14 LED for parked car ventilation

15 Rear window defroster

16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –

please keep clear and unobstructed

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

101

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The current setting for air distribution is dis-

played on the Control Display.

A congenial climate

The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-

tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-

tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you

only need to select an interior temperature that

you find pleasant.

The following sections contain more detailed

information on the available setting options.

Most settings are stored for the remote control

currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile

settings on page 29.

AUTO program

The AUTO program handles the

adjustment of air distribution to the

windshield and side windows, in

the direction of the upper body, and in the foot-

well, as well as the adjustment of the air volume.

It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-

ture to outside influences throughout the year.

The cooling is switched on automatically with

the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-

densation sensor controls the program in such

a way that window condensation is prevented

as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program

To meet your individual needs, you can

increase or decrease the intensity of the auto-

matic climate control.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open

"Climate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the

controller.

4. Select the desired intensity and press the

controller.

The marked intensity of the automatic

program is switched on.

Convertible program

When the convertible top is opened, the con-

vertible program can also be selected. In the

convertible program, the automatic climate

control is optimized for driving with the convert-

ible top open. In addition, the air supply is

increased as the speed increases.

If the convertible program has been selected,

it is automatically active every time the top is

opened.

The effect of the convertible program can

be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector

is installed.<

Temperature

Set the desired temperature indi-

vidually on the driver's and front

passenger side.

The automatic climate control

achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-

ble at any time of year, if necessary with the

maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then

keeps it constant.

When switching between different tem-

perature settings in rapid succession, the

automatic climate control does not have suffi-

cient time to achieve the set temperature.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Climate

102

Adapting temperature in upper body

region

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-

troller.

4. Select the field by moving the controller and

adjust the air distribution by turning the

controller.

Defrosting windows and removing

condensation

Quickly remove ice and condensa-

tion from the windshield and front

side windows.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster

switches off automatically after a

certain amount of time.

Convertible: the rear window defroster is only

activated when the rear window is closed.

Air volume, manual

You can adjust the air volume by

turning. You can reactivate the

automatic mode for the air volume

with the AUTO button.

Manual air distribution

You can specify the air distribution.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-

troller.

The driver's and front passenger side can

be adjusted separately with the fields on the

right or left side.

4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if

necessary.

Move the controller to the right or left

repeatedly until the driver's side or front

passenger side is selected.

5. Select the desired field by moving the con-

troller.

6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-

tion.

Driver's side:

1Airflow directed toward the windshield

and side windows

2Airflow for the upper body

3Air to footwell

Front passenger side:

4Airflow for the upper body

5Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button raises and

lowers the air distribution settings on the

Control Display.<

Switching the cooling function on

and off

The cooling function cools and

dehumidifies the incoming air

before reheating it as needed

according to the temperature setting. Depend-

ing on the weather, the windshield may fog over

briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati-

cally with the AUTO program. The passenger

compartment can only be cooled with the

engine running.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

103

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Maximum cooling

Maximally cooled air is obtained as

quickly as possible from an outside

temperature above 327/06 and

with the engine running.

The automatic climate control changes over to

the lowest temperature and switches into the

recirculated-air mode. The maximum air quan-

tity only flows out of the vents for the upper

body. It is therefore necessary for these vents to

be open for maximum cooling.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air

control/recirculated-air mode

You can respond to unpleasant

odors or pollutants in the immedi-

ate environment by temporarily

suspending the supply of outside air. The sys-

tem then recirculates the air currently within the

vehicle. In AUC mode, a sensor detects pollut-

ants in the outside air and controls the shut-off

automatically.

Press the button repeatedly to run through the

following control sequence:

>LED off: outside air flows into the vehicle

continuously.

>Right LED on, AUC mode: the system

detects pollutants in the outside air and

responds by blocking the supply of outside

air when required.

>Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the

supply of outside air into the vehicle is shut

off continuously.

If condensation starts to form on the

inside window surfaces during operation

in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch

it off while also increasing the air volume as

required.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used

over a longer period of time, as the air quality

inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<

Residual heat

The heat stored in the engine is

used to heat the passenger com-

partment, e.g. while stopped at a

school to pick up a child.

The function can be switched on when the fol-

lowing conditions are met:

>up to 15 minutes after switching off the

engine

>engine at operating temperature

>sufficient battery voltage

>outside temperature below 777/256

The LED lights up when the function is

switched on.

With the ignition switch at radio readiness or

higher the interior temperature, the air volume

and the air distribution can be set.

Switching off automatic climate control

The air volume, the heater and the

cooling function are all switched

off.

You can restart the automatic cli-

mate control by pressing any of its buttons

except the REST button.

Ventilation

1Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and

closing air vents

2Levers for changing the airflow direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the

vent outlets; otherwise, they could be cat-

apulted outwards and cause injuries.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Climate

104

Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool

air in your direction, for instance, if the interior

has become too warm, etc.

Draft-free ventilation

Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past

you and is not directed straight at you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter removes dust and pollen from

the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter

provides additional protection by filtering gas-

eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW

center replaces this combined filter as a stan-

dard part of your scheduled maintenance.

You can have more detailed information shown

on the Control Display, refer to page 77.

Parked car ventilation

The concept

The parked car ventilation blows air into the

passenger compartment to lower interior tem-

peratures.

It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any

outside temperature.

You can set two different times for the system

to start. The parked car ventilation can also be

switched on and off directly. It remains

switched on for 30 minutes.

Since the system uses a substantial amount of

electrical current, you should refrain from acti-

vating it twice in succession without allowing

the battery to be recharged in normal operation

between uses.

The air emerges through the upper body region

vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent

outlets must be open for the system to operate.

The parked car ventilation system is operated

via iDrive.

Switching on and off directly

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open

"Climate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press

the controller.

The parked car ventilation is switched on.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open

"Climate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

105

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

5. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

6. Select the time and press the controller.

The first time setting is highlighted.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The next adjustment is highlighted.

9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the

last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating timer

Move the controller to the left or right to select

"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con-

troller.

The switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control lights up.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control flashes when the parked car

ventilation has switched on.

The parked car ventilation is only avail-

able for activation within the subsequent

24 hours. After that, the time must be reacti-

vated.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

106

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote

control*

The concept

The integrated universal remote control

replaces up to three different hand-held trans-

mitters for various items of radio-controlled

equipment such as door openers and house

alarm systems. The integrated universal remote

control registers and stores signals from the

original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter

can be programmed on one of the three mem-

ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched

on, this programmed memory button 1 can be

used to operate the respective feature. The

LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the

signal.

If you sell your vehicle one day, delete the saved

programs beforehand for your own security,

refer to page 107.

To prevent possible damage or injury,

before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect

the immediate area to make certain that no peo-

ple, animals or objects are within the travel

range of the device. Also, comply with the

safety precautions of the original hand-held

transmitter.<

Checking compatibility

If you see this symbol on the packaging

or in the manual supplied with the orig-

inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to

assume that it is compatible with the integrated

universal remote control.

If you have additional questions, please

contact your BMW center or call:

1-800-355-3515.

Information is also provided on the Internet at:

www.bmwusa.com or

www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson

Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1Memory buttons

2LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters

1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.

2. When using for the first time: Press both

outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 sec-

onds until the LED 2 flashes. all stored pro-

grams are deleted.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a

distance of approx. 2 in/5 cm to 8 in/20 cm

from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the

hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the particular

system of the original hand-held transmitter

used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on

the original hand-held transmitter and the

desired memory button 1 on the integrated

universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes

slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes

rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2

does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-

onds, alter the distance.

5. To program other original hand-held trans-

mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

107

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

The corresponding memory button 1 is now

programmed with the signal of the original

hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the system when the engine is

running or when the ignition is switched on.

If the device can not be used after

repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-

nating-code system. To do so, either read the

instructions for the original hand-held transmit-

ter or hold down the programmed memory

button 1 of the integrated universal remote

control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal

remote control flashes rapidly for a short time

and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this

indicates that the original hand-held transmitter

uses an alternating-code system. In the case of

an alternating-code system, program the mem-

ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code

transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held

transmitters

To program the integrated universal remote

control, consult the operating instructions for

the equipment to be set. You will find informa-

tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-

tion.

When programming hand-held transmitters

that employ an alternating code, please observe

the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of

a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the

remote-controlled equipment.

2. Program the integrated universal remote

control as described above in Fixed-code

hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the

device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the

equipment to be set. After step 4, you have

approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1

of the integrated universal remote control

three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now

programmed with the signal of the original

hand-held transmitter.

Deleting stored programs

Press both outer buttons 1 for approx. 20 sec-

onds, maintaining pressure until the LED 2

starts to flash: all stored programs are deleted.

Programs cannot be deleted individually.

Glove compartment

Opening

Press the button. The glove compartment

opens automatically and the lamps come on.

Closing

Fold the cover up.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci-

dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after

use.<

Rechargeable flashlight*

The flashlight is located on the left side of the

glove compartment.

The flashlight can remain there continuously.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

108

Remove the flashlight from the socket when

needed.

Be sure that the flashlight is switched off

when it is inserted into its socket. Failure

to comply with this precaution could lead to

overcharging and damage.<

Center armrest

A storage compartment is located in the arm-

rest between the front seats. This compartment

is integrated into the central locking system and

can also be locked separately using the hotel

function, refer to page 33.

To open the cover:

Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be

folded upward.

Depending on the version, the storage com-

partment can be equipped with a correspond-

ing cradle

*

for the telephone or mobile phone.

Adjusting height

The center armrest can be set in two positions.

Pull the right button:

Move the armrest upward or downward and

lock it in the desired position.

Storage compartments

Storage compartment behind center

armrest

To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge.

The compartment contains the cup holder

and

the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 33.

Other compartments and nets

Other compartments are provided in the doors

as well as in the front center console

*

.

Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors.

Storage nets are located on the backrests of the

front seats and in the passenger footwell

*

.

To prevent the risk of injury during an

accident, do not stow hard or sharp-

edged items in the nets.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

109

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Another storage space is located in the luggage

compartment in the right side panel. If you wish,

this is also suitable to store the onboard docu-

mentation.

Coupe: clothes hooks

To fold down, press at the top edge.

When hanging clothing on the hooks,

ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's

vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.

If you do so, they could cause personal injury to

occupants during braking or evasive maneu-

vers.<

Cup holders

The compartment of the rear center console

contains a built-in cup holder and a removable

one.

The removable cup holder can be inserted into

the side of the center console.

Do not place glass containers in the cup

holders. This would increase the risk of

injury in the event of an accident.<

Ashtray

Opening

Press the trim strip of the cover.

Emptying

Press the opened cover beyond the resistance

point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for

removal.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories

110

Cigarette lighter

Press in the lighter with the engine running or

the ignition switched on.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops

back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by

the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns.

Always take along the remote control when you

leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for

example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical devices

Socket

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a

power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum

cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to

approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the

socket by inserting plugs of different shapes or

sizes.

In front passenger footwell

Access to the socket:

Fold open the cover.

Ski bag*

It permits safe and clean transport of up to two

pairs of standard skies or one snowboard.

You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/

2.10 m long.

Loading

1. Press the button downward and pull the

filler element forward.

2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats.

The zipper gives you easy access to stowed

items and facilitates drying of the ski bag.

3. Press the button in the luggage compart-

ment.

4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic

holder to secure it to the rear panel.

To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in

reverse order.

Make sure to load only clean skis into the ski

bag. Wrap sharp edges so that no damage

occurs.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls

111

Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-

tents. To do so, tighten the retaining belt at the

buckle.

Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to

do so, it could move around and endanger

occupants during braking or evasive maneu-

vers.

To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at

the bottom into the strip and press the filler ele-

ment back into place. Make sure that you do not

damage the rear seat upholstery.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips

This section is designed to provide you

with extra support by supplying information

useful in dealing with specific driving and

operating conditions.

Driving tips

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

114

Things to remember when driving

Breaking-in

Moving parts need time to adjust to one

another. To ensure that your vehicle continues

to provide optimized economy of operation

throughout an extended service life, we request

that you devote careful attention to the follow-

ing section.

Engine and differential

Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,

however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/

160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the

transmission's kick-down mode during these

initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be

increased.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox

Do not use the acceleration assistant during the

break-in period, refer to page 64.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their

manufacture, tires do not achieve their full

traction potential until after an initial break-in

period. It is therefore important to drive reserv-

edly during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of

approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized

contact and wear patterns between brake pads

and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during

this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch is only at its opti-

mized level after a distance driven of approx.

300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,

engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

Observe the break-in instructions again if com-

ponents mentioned above must be replaced

after subsequent driving operation.

General driving notes

Closing luggage compartment lid

Only drive with the luggage compartment

lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust

can penetrate into the passenger compart-

ment.<

If special circumstances should make it abso-

lutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the

luggage compartment lid open:

1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass

sunroof.

Convertible: with closed top, close all win-

dows.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic

climate control to a high level, refer to

page 102.

Hot exhaust system

As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-

atures are generated in the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed

adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to

them. When driving, standing at idle and while

parking, take care to avoid possible contact

between the hot exhaust system and any highly

flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,

etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it

the risk of serious property damage as well as

personal injury.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips

115

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Mobile communications devices in

vehicle

BMW advises against using mobile com-

munications devices, e.g. mobile phones,

inside the vehicle without a direct connection

to an external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle

electronics and mobile communications device

can interfere with one another. In addition, there

is no assurance that the radiation emitted dur-

ing transmission will be conveyed out of the

vehicle interior.<

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads,

reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur-

face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-

planing, and is characterized by a partial or

complete loss of contact between the tires and

the road surface, ultimately undermining your

ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread

depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini-

mum tire tread on page 187.

Driving through water

Do not drive through water on the road if

it is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the

vehicle's engine, electrical systems and trans-

mission may be damaged.<

Using handbrake on inclines

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with

the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise

greater clutch wear will result.<

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox

Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold

the vehicle on a hill by applying the throt-

tle, but engage the handbrake instead. Other-

wise overheating can occur in the transmission

region.<

Starting assistant

The starting assistant enables you to start off

conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is

not required for this purpose.

1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.

2. Release the footbrake and immediately

drive off quickly.

The starting assistant holds the vehicle

for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the

footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle

may also roll back slightly during this time.

After releasing the footbrake, immediately start

quickly; otherwise, the starting assistant no

longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds

and it begins to roll back.<

Braking safely

Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard

feature. In situations that require it, it is best to

brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains

steering responsiveness, you can still avoid

possible obstacles with a minimum of steering

effort.

Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with

sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indicate to

the driver that ABS is in its active mode.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

brake pedal. Even light but consistent

pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,

brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions

When driving on wet roads or in heavy rain, it is

a good idea to apply light pressure to the brake

pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions

to ensure that this maneuver does not endan-

ger other road users. The heat generated in this

process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure

that full braking efficiency will then be available

when you need it.

Hills

To prevent overheating and thus reduced

efficiency of the brake system, downshift

to a gear in which only minimal brake applica-

tions are needed when descending long or

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

116

steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis-

tent pedal pressure can lead to high tempera-

tures, brake wear and possibly even brake fail-

ure.<

The braking action of the engine can be further

increased by downshifting in the manual mode

of the automatic transmission, possibly as far as

first gear, refer to page 63. This prevents an

excessive load on the brakes.

Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in

idle or with the engine switched off; other-

wise, there will be no engine braking action or

power-assisted braking and steering.

Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other

objects to protrude into the area of movement

of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors

When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,

during extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all, and in operating conditions where

brake applications are less frequent, there is an

increased tendency for corrosion to form on

rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the

brake pads. This occurs because the minimum

pressure which must be exerted by the pads

during brake applications to clean the rotors is

not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the

brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating

effect that even extended application will fail to

cure.

When vehicle is parked

Condensation forms in the automatic climate

control during operation, and then exits under

the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under

the vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car wash

To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle

from being damaged, always fold them in by

hand before entering an automatic car wash.

With comfort access and automatic

transmission

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in the selector

lever position N. Also refer to page 37.

Cargo loading

To avoid loading the tires beyond their

approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-

heating and increases the rate at which damage

develops inside the tires. The ultimate result

can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your

vehicle's placard

*

:

The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX lbs. or YYY kg, otherwise the vehicle

may be damaged and unstable driving con-

ditions may result.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the XXX amount equals

800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas-

sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity is

200 lbs.:

800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips

117

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity calculated

in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of

the load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult the manual for

transporting a trailer to determine how this

may reduce the available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of

occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the

weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage

can be transported.

Stowing cargo

>Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low

as possible, placing it directly behind the

bulkhead behind the rear seats.

>Cover sharp edges and corners.

Securing cargo

>Use the luggage net

*

or securing straps to

hold down small and lightweight luggage

and cargo.

>Heavy-duty cargo straps

*

for securing

larger and heavier objects are available at

your BMW center. Four lashing eyes

mounted in the luggage compartment are

used to secure these heavy-duty cargo

straps, refer to arrows.

>Please observe the special instructions

supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Always position and secure the load as

described above. If you do not, it can

endanger the passengers during braking or

evasive maneuvers.

When fastening lashings, use only the lashing

eyes, refer to illustration; otherwise, the lash-

ings could come loose or you could damage the

vehicle.

Never exceed the approved gross vehicle

weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer

to page 210, as excessive loads can pose a

safety hazard, and may also put you in violation

of freeway safety laws.

You should never transport heavy or hard

objects unsecured in the passenger compart-

ment, as they could fly around and pose a safety

hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt

braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Pad on bottom of luggage

compartment

You can use the pad as needed, for example to

transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is

washable and has an anti-skid effect.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

This chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your route

so that your navigation system guides you

reliably to your destination.

Navigation

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Starting navigation system

120

Starting navigation system

Your navigation system can use satellites to

ascertain the precise position of your vehicle

and guide you reliably to any destination you

enter.

Navigation DVD

The navigation system requires a special navi-

gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at

your BMW center.

Inserting navigation DVD

1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled

side up.

2. Wait several seconds for the system to scan

the data from the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-

sible that it is jammed. A message appears on

the Control Display.

Display in the assistance

window

You can display the route or the current position

in the assistance window. This display remains

visible even if you switch to another application.

1. Move the controller to the right to enter the

assistance window.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired route view or "Current

position".

4. Press the controller.

The contents of the assistance window are con-

tinually updated as you drive.

*

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

121

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from

among the following options:

>Entering a destination manually, see below

>Entering destination via voice*, refer to

page 124

>Selecting destination using information,

refer to page 126

>Selecting destination from a list, refer to

Destination list, page 127

>Selecting destination from address book,

refer to page 128

>Selecting home address, refer to page 130

After selecting your destination you can pro-

ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to

page 132.

Operating navigation system

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-

tionary, and always obey the traffic regu-

lations and road signs in the event of any con-

tradiction between traffic and road conditions

and the instructions issued by the navigation

system. If you do not observe this precaution,

you may be in violation of the law, and can

endanger vehicle occupants and other road

users.<

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open

"Navigation".

3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

Entering a destination

manually

The system's word-matching principle makes it

easier for you to enter the names of streets or

towns, refer to page 131. This allows you to

enter different spellings and completes your

entry automatically so that stored names can be

called up quickly.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Navigation" is selected and

press the controller.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination entry

122

3. Change to the second field from the top if

necessary. Turn the controller until "Enter

address" is selected and press the control-

ler.

The system also assists you with the following

features:

>If you do not enter a street, the system will

guide you to the downtown area of a town or

city.

>You can skip the entry of country and town/

city if the current entries are being retained

for your new destination.

Selecting country

1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed

country and press the controller.

A list of available countries appears on the

display.

2. Select the country of destination and press

the controller.

In order to be able to start the destination guid-

ance, at least the town/city of the destination or

its zip code must be entered.

Entering destination via town/city

name

1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/

city and press the controller.

2. Select the first letter and press the control-

ler.

A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-

ter appears on the Control Display.

3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:

>To delete individual numbers or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.

>To delete all digits or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller, holding it

down.

4. Enter additional letters if necessary.

The list gradually grows smaller each time

you enter a new letter.

>Enter blank space if necessary:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

5. Change to the third field from the top if nec-

essary. Turn the controller until the town or

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

123

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

city name is selected from the list and press

the controller.

Entering town/city of destination via

zip code

1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-

ler.

2. Input the zip code:

Select the individual digits and press the

controller.

>Enter blank space if necessary:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

>To delete individual digits or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.

>To delete all digits or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller, holding it

down.

3. Select the zip code and press the controller.

The corresponding town/city of destination

is displayed.

4. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until the destination is

selected and press the controller.

Entering street, house number and

intersection

After the street you can also enter the intersec-

tion or the house number.

Entering street and intersection

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and

press the controller.

2. Enter the street.

The street is entered in exactly the same

way as the destination town/city.

The intersection is entered in the same way as

the street.

Entering a street without entering

destination

You can also enter a street without entering a

destination. In this case all streets of the

entered country are offered for selection. The

related town/city is displayed after the street

name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can

undo this entry. This may be practical if the

desired street does not exist in the entered des-

tination, because, for example, it belongs to

another part of the town/city.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination entry

124

1. Change to upper field.

The arrow is selected.

2. Turn the controller to the right until the

request for the entry of a street in the coun-

try appears and press the controller.

3. Change to the second field from the top and

enter the street.

Entering house number

1. Select "House number" and press the con-

troller.

2. Enter the house number:

Select the individual digits and press the

controller.

3. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until the house number

is selected and press the controller.

Only house numbers stored for the street

on the navigation DVD can be entered.

Starting destination guidance with

manual destination entry

Select "Start guidance" and press the control-

ler.

Destination guidance starts immediately.

If destination guidance is not to be started

immediately:

Select "Add to destination list" and press the

controller.

The destination is stored in the destination list,

refer to page 127.

Entering destination via

voice*

In conjunction with the Professional navigation

system, you can enter the desired destination

via the voice input system. When entering the

destination, it is possible to change between

speech input and iDrive at any time. Reactivate

the speech input function for this purpose if

necessary.

With {Options} you can have the system

read aloud the possible commands.<

1. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

2. {Enter address}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

125

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

Selecting country

Say the country of destination in the language

of the voice command system.

Entering destination

To enter the destination, spell it using the cus-

tomary spelling of the destination country.

Say the letters smoothly and at normal volume,

avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

The system can suggest up to 20 desti-

nations that match your entries. Up to

6 entries are displayed at once on the Con-

trol Display.

You can also select the town/city from the list

via iDrive:

Turn the controller until the destination is

selected and press the controller.

Entering street and house number

The street is entered in the same way as the

destination.

To enter the house number:

Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Saving destination

The destination is added to the destination list

or can be stored in the address book.

Map-guided destination

selection

If you only know the location of the town or

street of the destination, then it is possible to

input the destination by using a map. You can

use the cursor to limit the destination in the map

and then apply it into the destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Say country of destination.

1. Spell town/city name:

Say at least the first three letters of the

destination. The more letters you say,

the more exactly the system recognizes

the town/city.

A destination is suggested by the system.

2. Selecting location:

Select {Yes}

or

Other town/city:

{No}

Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

The following options are available:

{Next page}: additional entries of the

list are displayed.

{Repeat}: the town/city can be

respelled.

Say the house number.

{Start guidance}

{Add to destination list} or

{add to address book}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination entry

126

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

A section of a map is displayed on the Con-

trol Display:

>During destination guidance, centered

around the current destination

>With the destination guidance deacti-

vated, centered around the last destina-

tion entered

4. Turn the controller to change the scale.

Move the controller in the desired direction

to move the map.

The controller can be moved to the left,

right, forward, backward and also diago-

nally.

5. Press the controller to accept or store the

destination in the destination guidance sys-

tem.

The selected town/city of destination and

other menu items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

>"Start route guidance" starts destination

guidance.

>"Show current position" places the cur-

rent position in the center of the map.

>"Show destination position" places the

current destination in the center of the

map.

>"Return to map" changes back to the

"Input map".

> Exit the menu.

7. Press the controller.

The map for destination input can also be called

up from the map view:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using

information

You can display selected destinations for

towns/cities, select them and adopt them into

the destination guidance if necessary, e.g.

hotels, places of interest or hospitals.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Information" and press the control-

ler.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

127

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

4. Select location:

>"On destination"

>"On location"

>"On a new destination"

5. Press the controller.

6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-

taurants", and press the controller.

Destinations are shown on the Control Dis-

play which are sorted by distance or alpha-

betically.

7. Select a destination and press the control-

ler.

8. Select a menu item:

>To adopt the address into the destina-

tion list and start the destination guid-

ance:

Select "Select as destination" and press

the controller.

>To establish a telephone connection:

Select "Call" and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination list

The last 20 destinations entered into the desti-

nation list are displayed. You can select these

destinations and adopt them into the destina-

tion guidance system.

For example, in order to plan a longer route, you

can store all of the destinations you wish to visit

in the destination list ahead of time, refer to

Entering a destination manually on page 121.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The destination last entered appears at the top

of the destination list.

This symbol indicates the current destina-

tion.

To display other destinations in the destination

list:

Turn the controller.

Adopting the destination into the

destination guidance system

1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination entry

128

Editing the destination list

1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

>To store the entry:

Select "Add to address book".

>To display information on the destina-

tion:

Select "Information on destination".

>To delete the entry:

Select "Delete entry".

>To delete all entries:

Select "Delete list". Destination guid-

ance is switched off.

>To change the entry:

Select "Edit". For operation, refer to

Entering destination via town/city name,

page 122.

3. Press the controller.

Address book

Opening address book

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address book

You can store approx. 100 destinations in the

address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con-

troller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-

troller.

4. Enter names and addresses.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press

the controller.

The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also store a destination from the desti-

nation list in the address book, refer to

page 127.

Storing current position*

The current position can be adopted into the

address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Turn the controller until "New address" is

selected and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

129

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

3. Select "Use current location as address"

and press the controller.

The name given can be changed. For oper-

ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-

ally, page 121.

4. Select "Store in address book" and press

the controller.

You can also enter your current position in the

address book if you have left the sector covered

by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must

enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address

book

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

The stored entries are displayed on the

Control Display.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

To start destination guidance:

Select "Start guidance" and press the control-

ler.

Changing destinations from address

book

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-

troller.

4. Change the entry.

For operation, refer to Entering a destina-

tion manually, page 121.

Deleting individual destinations from

address book

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-

troller.

Deleting all destinations from address

book

1. Open start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the

controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination entry

130

4. Select "Delete data" and press the control-

ler.

5. Select "Delete address book" and press the

controller.

6. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Storing home address

You can store your current position or the cur-

rent destination as a home address in the

address book. This entry is in the second posi-

tion in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Home address" is

selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or

"Save current destination" during the desti-

nation guidance, and press the controller.

To select the home address as the destination:

1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

To change the entry:

1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-

troller. For operation, refer to Entering a

destination manually, page 121.

Selecting route

You can influence the calculated route by

choosing certain route criteria. You can change

the route criteria as often as you like when

entering the destination and whenever the des-

tination guidance is active.

The route is planned according to fixed rules,

taking the road type into account, e.g. whether

it involves freeways or winding roads. The road

types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a

result, the routes recommended by the naviga-

tion system may not always be the same ones

that you would choose based on personal expe-

rience.

Changing route criteria

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Route preference"

is selected and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control

Display.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

131

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

>"With highways"

Freeways and major traffic arteries are

given priority.

>"Avoid highways"

Freeways are avoided where possible.

>"Fast route"

The fast route, being a combination of

the shortest possible route and the fast-

est roads

>"Short route"

Short route, regardless of how fast or

slow progress will be

4. Press the controller.

The route criterion is highlighted.

5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-

terion and then press the controller:

>"Avoid tollroads"

Tollroads are avoided where possible.

>"Avoid ferries"

Ferries are avoided where possible.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

The route criteria can also be changed in the

arrow or map display:

Select the respective symbol and press the

controller.

Word matching principle

The system supports the word matching princi-

ple to make it easier for you to enter the names

of streets or towns/cities. The system runs

ongoing checks, comparing your destination

entries with the data stored on the navigation

DVD as the basis for instant response. The user

benefits include:

>Names of specific locations can also vary

from the official versions, provided that the

spelling of the entry corresponds to a stan-

dard form used in another country.

Example:

Instead of 'Munich", you can also enter the

German spelling 'München' or the Italian

spelling 'Monaco'.

>When you are entering the names of towns/

cities and streets, the system will complete

them automatically as soon as enough let-

ters are available to ensure unambiguous

identification.

>The system only accepts name entries

beginning with letters that are stored on the

navigation DVD. The system will not accept

nonexistent names and addresses.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination guidance

132

Destination guidance

Starting destination

guidance

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Navigation" is selected and

press the controller.

2. Turn the controller until the destination is

selected from the destination list and press

the controller or enter a new destination,

refer to page 121.

3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

After the route has been calculated, destination

guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-

play on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in

the arrow or map display:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can operate

other equipment via iDrive at any time. You are

notified well in advance of a necessary change

of direction by spoken instructions and the dis-

play of the direction arrows.

Terminating/continuing

destination guidance

In the arrow display or map view

Select the symbol and press the controller.

In the destination list

This symbol marks the current destination.

1. Select the current destination and press the

controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

If the destination was not reached before the

end of the last trip, upon restarting you will see

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

133

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

the question:

"Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically

after a short time.

To start destination guidance immediately:

Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Route display

You have the option of displaying various views

of the route during destination guidance.

From another menu, you can switch

directly to the screen last displayed, refer

to Comfort opening of menu items on

page 18.<

Displaying arrow display

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is

selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is displayed.

1Switching voice instructions on/off

2Selecting route criteria

3Starting/stopping destination guidance

4Arrow to destination as the crow flies

5Distance to the next change of direction

6Current position

7Direction of travel

>Hollow arrow:

Destination guidance on the calculated

route.

>Solid arrow:

Arrow shows the route to be calculated

from a bird's eye view when the vehicle

is not located in an area contained on the

navigation DVD, e.g. in a multilevel park-

ing lot.

Depending on the equipment, the estimated

time of arrival and the distance to the destina-

tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the

Control Display.

Before a change of direction, the appearance of

the arrow changes.

1Street name for change of direction

2Distance to change of direction

3Change of direction

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying map display

You can have your current position displayed on

a map. After starting the destination guidance,

the planned route is shown on the map.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination guidance

134

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.

Turn the controller until the desired map

view is selected:

>"Map facing north"

>"Map direction of travel"

>"Perspective"

3. Press the controller.

1Switching voice instructions on/off

2Starting/stopping destination guidance

3Selecting destination using map

4Showing/hiding information last selected,

refer to Selecting destination using infor-

mation on page 126

5Changing map view

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

6Changing route criteria

7Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The estimated time of arrival and the distance

to the destination are shown in the bottom line

of the Control Display.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

At scales of less than 300 miles/500 km, you

have the option of deciding whether to orient

the map to north, toward your current direction

of travel, or show the map in perspective. At

scales of 300 miles/500 km or greater, the map

always points toward north.

Changing map view

Select the corresponding symbol and press the

controller.

The next map view is displayed.

Changing scale

Turn the controller to change the scale.

Displaying towns/cities and streets of

the route

You can have the roads and towns along the

route displayed during destination guidance.

The distances remaining to be traveled on each

individual road are also displayed.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Route list" is

selected and press the controller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

135

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

Destination guidance

through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off

during the destination guidance in the arrow or

map view:

1. In the map view:

Move the controller to the left to change the

field.

2. In the arrow and map display:

Turn the controller until the symbol is

selected and press the controller.

To switch the voice instructions on/off at any

time:

1. Open start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"

is selected and press the controller.

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Languages" is selected and

press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Navigation voice

instructions on" is selected and press the

controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use

*

.

Repeating and canceling voice

instructions

With the programmable buttons on the steering

wheel you can also make the following settings,

refer to page 54:

>To repeat the voice instruction:

Press the button.

>To switch voice instructions on/off:

Maintain pressure on the button for several

seconds.

Setting volume of voice instructions

The volume can only be adjusted during a voice

instruction.

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if required.

2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction

to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the

audio sources.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Destination guidance

136

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Bypassing route sections

During destination guidance, you can revise the

navigation system's route recommendations to

avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the

number of miles/kilometers that you want to

travel before returning to the original route.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top.

Turn the controller until "New route" is

selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired

number and press the controller.

The route is recalculated.

To exit from the menu without changing the

route:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying current position

You can also display your current position with

the destination guidance switched off.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.

Turn the controller until "Current position"

is selected and press the controller.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a

town or city, your current map coordinates will

appear.

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can also have the current position dis-

played on a map, refer to page 133.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation Driving tips

137

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility

What to do if …

What to do if …

>a navigation DVD is inserted, but the

request to insert the DVD is displayed on

the Control Display?

The navigation DVD may not be the right

DVD for the navigation system. The DVD is

labeled accordingly.

>you request the current position of your

vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-

play?

The system is unable to receive enough

GPS signals at your current position due to

obstructions, your current position is not

yet available on your navigation DVD, or the

system is in the process of calculating your

current position. As a rule, reception is

guaranteed in the open air.

>the destination guidance does not accept a

destination?

The data of the destination is not stored on

the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a

destination that is as close as possible to

the original.

>the destination guidance does not accept a

destination without the street name?

On the navigation DVD, no downtown area

can be determined for the city or town

entered. Enter any street, or a destination

such as the railway station etc., then start

the destination guidance.

>you want to enter a destination for the des-

tination guidance, but it is not possible to

select the letters for your desired entry?

The data of the destination is not stored on

the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this

case, the system will not offer you any let-

ters to choose from. Select a destination

that is as close as possible to the original.

>the system stops furnishing directions on

which way to turn as you approach intersec-

tions?

You are driving in an area that has not yet

been completely recorded on the naviga-

tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a

turn, you will see an arrow which indicates

the general direction of your planned route.

Or you have left the recommended route

and the system requires a few seconds to

calculate a new recommended route.

>the navigation system does not react to

entries?

If the battery has just been reconnected

after having been disconnected, it then

takes up to 10 minutes before the system is

once again operational.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Entertainment

This chapter describes the operation

of the radio and CD player as well as

their tone settings.

Entertainment

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

On/off and tone

140

On/off and tone

The following audio sources have shared

controls and setting options:

>Radio Professional

*

or

Radio Business

>CD player

>CD changer

*

Controls

The audio sources can be operated using:

>Buttons near CD player

>iDrive

>Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

Buttons near CD player

The layout of the buttons can vary depending

on your vehicle's equipment.

Equipment with a single drive:

Equipment with two drives:

1Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

>Press: switch on/off.

When you switch on, the last set radio

station or CD track is played.

>Turn: adjust volume.

2Drive for audio CDs

3 Eject CD

4 Station scan/track search

>Change radio station.

>Select track for CD player and

CD changer.

5Drive for navigation DVDs

Operation via iDrive

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

You have the following choices:

>"FM" and "AM": radio reception

>"WB": Weather Band station

>"SAT": satellite radio

>"CD": CD player or CD changer

>"Set": depending on the audio source,

other adjustments can be made, e.g. with

the radio: update station with strongest

reception, store station, tone control,

sample stations.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

141

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

From another menu, you can switch

directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items on

page 18.<

The selected audio source is stored for the

remote control currently in use.

Switching on/off

To switch the Entertainment sound output

on/off:

Press knob 1 next to the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indi-

cates that sound output is switched off.

For equipment with an individual drive, the

sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes

with the ignition switched off.

To do so, switch the sound output on again.

Adjusting volume

Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the

desired volume is set.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Tone control

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble

and bass, or the speed-dependent volume

increase.

The sound settings are globally adjusted for all

audio sources.

The settings are stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Changing tone settings

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press

the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

The tone settings can also be selected when

you have opened "Entertainment" in the start

menu:

Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the

controller.

Treble and bass

1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

On/off and tone

142

2. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

Balance and fader

You can adjust the volume distribution in the

same manner as "Treble / Bass".

>"Balance": left/right volume distribution

>"Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control

The speed-dependent volume control auto-

matically increases the volume with increasing

speed. You can set various stages for the

increase in volume.

1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-

troller.

2. Turn controller:

The adjustment is applied; the field can be

changed.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*

You can select a spatial sound effect that

improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency

ranges.

1. Select "LOGIC7" and press the controller.

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller.

LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.

To switch off spatial sound:

Select "Off" and press the controller.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered

trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the

Harman International Group.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

143

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Equalizer*

You can set individual sound frequency ranges:

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to

select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

Resetting tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default

settings.

1. Open start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press

the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Radio

144

Radio

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM

wavebands.

Listening to radio

Press the button if the sound output is switched

off.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn

controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Stations are shown on the Control Display on

the basis of various selection criteria, e.g.

"Presets".

If "Autostore" does not display any stations or

if the stations displayed can no longer be

received, to update the station with the stron-

gest signal, refer to page 145.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

In addition to the stations currently displayed,

you can have stations with another selection

criterion displayed.

Professional radio*

You can choose from the following selection

criteria:

>"All stations":

Stations that can currently be received in

the "FM" waveband.

>"Autostore":

The stations with the strongest received

signals in the "AM" waveband.

>"Presets":

Stations you have stored, refer to page 146.

Radio Business

You can choose from the following selection

criteria:

>"Autostore":

The stations with the strongest signal, refer

to page 145.

>"Presets":

Stations you have stored, refer to page 146.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

145

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Changing selection criteria

1. Change into the second field from the top.

2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-

tion criterion is selected and press the con-

troller.

Buttons next to CD player

Press the button for the corresponding

direction.

The system switches to the next displayed sta-

tion.

You can also change stations with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Sampling stations, scan

The system automatically plays a brief sample

from each of the stations on the current wave-

band.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Scan starts.

To stop the scan:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels the scan search, and the radio

remains on the current station.

Buttons next to CD player

To start scan, hold down the button for

the corresponding direction.

To stop scan, press the button again.

Selecting the frequency manually

With "Manual" you can select stations that are

received in addition to those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-

quency.

Updating stations with best reception

If you are on a longer journey and leave the

transmission range of the stations originally set,

you can update the list of stations with the best

reception.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Radio

146

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest

reception is updated. The frequencies of the

stations are displayed.

Storing stations

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected

and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Turn the controller until the desired selec-

tion criterion is selected and press the con-

troller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station.

"Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory position is selected.

The number of the memory position

appears beside the name or frequency of

the station.

7. Press the controller.

The station is stored.

The stations of the last selection criterion are

displayed again after a short time.

The stations are stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

147

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Changing a memory position

1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired station.

"Set" is selected.

3. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory position is selected.

The number of the memory position

appears beside the name or frequency of

the station.

6. Press the controller.

The station is stored.

RDS Radio Data System

RDS transmits additional information in the FM

frequency range. If the reception conditions are

good, the station names are shown on the Con-

trol Display. If the reception is weak or dis-

rupted, it can take some time before the station

names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off*

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

RDS is activated.

Automatically sorting

stations*

For the "All stations" selection criterion, you

can set whether the most frequently used sta-

tions are displayed at the beginning.

1. Select "All stations" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.

The most frequently used stations are

shown at the beginning.

Weather news flashes*

Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-

anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)

of the US Department of Trade. Weather news

flashes are repeated every for to six minutes

and are routinely updated at intervals of one to

three hours, and more often when necessary.

Most stations operate 24 hours a day.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Radio

148

In case of a storm, the National Weather Ser-

vice interrupts the routine weather news and

transmits special warning messages instead.

If you have a question about NOAA Weather

Radio, please contact the nearest office of the

National Weather Service. Details are also pro-

vided on the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.

Calling up weather news flashes

1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

2. Select a station.

The station for weather news flashes may be

unavailable in some regions.

High Definition Radio*

Many stations transmit both analog and digital

signals. You can receive these stations digitally

and in improved sound quality.

Activating/deactivating digital radio

reception

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press

the controller.

4. Select "HD radio" and press the controller.

5. Select "Off" and press the controller.

The reception of digital stations is acti-

vated.

This symbol is displayed when a sender is

being received digitally.

With some stations the digital signals are not

transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig-

nals. If you are in an area in which the selected

station is not continuously received digitally,

playback switches between analog and digital

reception. This can result in repetitions or inter-

ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to

deactivate digital radio reception.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

149

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Updating stations offering digital

reception

If you are on a longer journey and leave the

transmission range of the stations originally set,

you can update the list of stations with the best

reception.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

4. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-

troller.

The display of the stations offering digital

reception is updated. This can take up to

2minutes.

Displaying additional information

With the digital stations, additional information

on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name

of the artist.

1. Select station and press controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information is displayed.

If a digital station is received again when the

station is changed, the additional information

will be displayed again following a brief interrup-

tion.

Satellite radio*

You can receive up to 100 different channels

with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined

packages. To receive the channels of your

choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology the signal may

fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Radio

150

Enabling or disabling channels

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Select "SAT".

4. Press the controller.

The channels are displayed.

These channels are enabled.

Enabling

1. Select a channel that has not yet been

enabled and press the controller.

A telephone number and the electronic

serial number, ESN, are displayed.

The electronic serial number is

required to enable or disable.<

2. To enable the channels:

Dial phone number.

Disabling

1. Select an enabled channel and press the

controller.

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.

The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-

played.

The electronic serial number is

required to disable.<

3. To have the channels disabled:

Dial phone number.

Selecting and storing channel

1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

Channels are shown on the Control Display

sorted on the basis of selection criteria.

2. Select a menu item:

>"Presets":

Up to twelve channels you have stored

previously.

>"All channels":

All channels are displayed.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

151

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

>"Categories":

All channels sorted by category, e.g.

news, jazz.

3. Press the controller.

4. If "Categories" has been selected:

Select the desired category and press the

controller.

The channels of this category are displayed.

5. Select a channel marked with this sym-

bol.

6. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Additional information

The name of the channel and additional infor-

mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.

the name of the artist.

1Artist

2Track

Storing channel

1. Select desired channel.

2. Press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Radio

152

4. Turn the controller to select a memory posi-

tion and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The stations of the last

selection criterion are displayed again after a

short time.

Changing channel with buttons next to

CD player

Press the button for the corresponding

direction.

The system switches to the next enabled chan-

nel.

Notes

If no signal can be received for more than

4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Con-

trol Display.

Reception may not be possible for certain

reasons, e.g. environmental influences or

topographical conditions. The satellite radio

has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or

underground garages, next to tall buildings,

near trees, mountains or other sources of radio

interference.

Reception is usually possible again as soon as

the signal is available again.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

153

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

Compressed audio files*

The CD player is capable of playing CDs with

compressed audio files, i.e. MP3.

CD player: starting CD

Equipment with two drives:

The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side

up.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out-

put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,

it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the

data depending on the directory structure.

To start playback when there is already a CD in

the drive:

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "CD" is selected and press

the controller.

4. On vehicles with a CD changer, change to

the second field from the top and turn the

controller until "CD" is selected and press

the controller.

The CD player is started.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out-

put is switched on.

To eject the CD, press the button on the

CD player.

The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

CD changer: starting CD

1. Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to

page 157.

2. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

3. Move the controller backwards to open

"Entertainment".

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "CD" is selected and press

the controller.

*

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

CD player and CD changer

154

5. Change to the second field from the top if

necessary. Turn the controller until the

desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press

the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD will be

selected.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-

zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.

CD 1, track 1.

The CD magazine's load status is indicated on

the Control Display.

Selecting a track

Buttons next to CD player

Press the button for the corresponding

direction repeatedly, continuing until you reach

the desired track on the current CD.

The CD will start to play at the start of the track.

The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive

Select a track by turning the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the directory if necessary and press

the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.

To change the directory:

Select the directory and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

155

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

To exit from the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying information on track*

With compressed audio files, you can display

possibly included information about the current

track, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information about the current track is dis-

played.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Sampling tracks, scan

The system automatically plays a brief sample

from each of the tracks on the current CD.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

To stop the scan:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels the scan search and the player

remains on the current track.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

>To sample all tracks of the current direc-

tory, select "Scan directory" and press

the controller.

>To sample all tracks of the CD, select

"Scan all" and press the controller.

To end scan search:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and

press the controller.

This cancels the scan search and the player

remains on the current track.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

CD player and CD changer

156

Repeating track

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

To cancel repeat mode:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

>To repeat the selected track, select

"Repeat track" and press the controller.

>To repeat all tracks of the current direc-

tory, select "Repeat directory" and press

the controller.

To cancel repeat mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"

and press the controller.

Random play sequence

In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are

played once in a random sequence.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

To cancel random mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

>To play all tracks of the current directory

in random order, select "Random direc-

tory" and press the controller.

>To play all tracks of the CD in random

order, select "Random all" and press the

controller.

To cancel random mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"

and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

157

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Fast forward/reverse

Buttons next to CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre-

sponding direction.

CD magazine

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in

the glove compartment.

Removing the CD magazine

To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or

remove them from it, you must first remove the

magazine from the CD changer:

Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.

Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the

magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be

read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs into/from

CD magazine

When inserting or removing CDs, remember to

hold them only by their edges, taking care to

avoid touching the reflective CD memory sur-

face.

To insert:

Insert one CD into each compartment of the

magazine with the labeled side up.

To remove:

Pull out the desired tray and remove the corre-

sponding CD.

Inserting CD magazine

Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in

the direction of the arrow.

The CD changer automatically reads in the

inserted CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are

officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,

otherwise severe eye damage can result.

Do not use self-recorded CDs with adhesive

labels as these can come loose during playback

due to heat build-up and cause irreparable

damage to the system.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard

diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/

DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-

wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no

longer be ejected.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

CD player and CD changer

158

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD

Plus

;

otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no

longer eject.<

General malfunctions

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. In some

instances they may be more sensitive to faulty

CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it

has been inserted correctly.

Humidity

High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-

tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and

temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/

DVDs, one of the following factors may be the

cause.

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs

Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-

recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent

data-creation or recording processes, or poor

quality or advanced age of the CD/DVD blank.

Label CDs/DVDs only on the top, using a marker

designed for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs

Avoid fingerprints dust, scratches, and mois-

ture.

Keep CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.

Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over

1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct

sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection

Manufacturers often provide CDs/DVDs with

copy protection. This can mean that some CDs/

DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to

a limited extent.

Care

If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side

of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available

cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from

the center outward.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

NavigationEntertainment Driving tips

159

Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications

This chapter summarizes how to operate

your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control

and how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.

Communications

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

162

Telephoning

The concept

Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone

preparation package. After a suitable mobile

phone has been logged onto the vehicle once,

you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive,

with the buttons on the steering wheel and by

voice.

A mobile phone that has been logged on once is

automatically detected again as soon as it is

brought back inside the vehicle, provided that

the engine is running or the ignition is switched

on. The logon data of up to four mobile phones

can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile

phones are detected simultaneously, the most

recently logged-on mobile phone can be oper-

ated via the vehicle.

Using a phone in your vehicle

Using the snap-in adapter*

The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone

cradle, enables the battery to be charged and

the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-

nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures

improved network reception and a consistent

voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-

ter which mobile phones will fit in the snap-in

adapters they offer.

BMW discourages the use of mobile

phones or other mobile communications

devices inside the vehicle without a direct con-

nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the

vehicle electronics and mobile communication

device can interfere with each other. In addition,

there is no assurance that the radiation that

results from transmission will be dissipated

from the vehicle interior.<

A mobile phone detected by the vehicle should

not be operated by the mobile phone's keypad;

otherwise malfunctions may occur.

For your safety

A car phone makes life more convenient in

many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-

gency. While you should consult your mobile

phone's separate owner's manual for a detailed

description of safety precautions and informa-

tion, we request that you direct your particular

attention to the following:

Only make entries when the traffic situa-

tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the

mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;

use the handsfree system instead. If you do not

observe this precaution, your being distracted

can endanger vehicle occupants and other road

users.<

Suitable mobile phones

Ask your BMW center which mobile phones

with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the

mobile phone preparation package or which

mobile phones will fit in the snap-in adapters

they offer. These mobile phones support the

functions described in this Owner's Manual,

provided they are running a certain software

version. Malfunctions can occur with other

mobile phones.

Care instructions

You can find what you need to know about car-

ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring

for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile

phone operating instructions.

Operating options

You can operate the mobile phone

*

using:

>The steering wheel, refer to page 11

>iDrive, refer to page 16

>Voice commands, refer to page 170

*

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

163

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Making calls with car phone:

BMW Assist calls

You can use the car phone via the handsfree

system for BMW Assist calls.

When the status information "BMW Assist" or

"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-

tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

It may not be possible to establish a telephone

connection using the mobile phone while a con-

nection is being established to BMW Assist

or while a call to BMW Assist is already in

progress. If this happens, you must unpair the

mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to

place a call with the mobile phone.

Initial operation

Logging on mobile phone on vehicle

The following prerequisites must be met:

>The mobile phone is ready to operate.

>The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to

page 165, and the mobile phone are active.

>Depending on the mobile phone, presets in

the mobile phone are required: e.g. acti-

vated via the menu item Bluetooth or the

menu item Connection not with confirma-

tion.

>To log on, specify any desired number as

the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-

tooth passkey is no longer required follow-

ing successful logon.

>The ignition is switched on.

Only log on the mobile phone with the

vehicle stopped; otherwise you may

become distracted and inadvertently endanger

your passengers and other road users.<

Switching on ignition

1. Insert the remote control as far as possible

into the ignition lock.

2. Switch on the switch on ignition by pressing

the Start/Stop button without depressing

the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation with iDrive

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start

menu.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Preparation with mobile phone

6. Additional operations must be carried out

on the mobile phone and differ depending

on the model, refer to the operating instruc-

tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-

nect or link under Bluetooth device.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

164

Logging on

Depending on your mobile phone, first, the dis-

play of your mobile phone and then the Control

Display will ask you to enter the Bluetooth pass-

key you specified.

Display on the Control Display if the Bluetooth

passkey can be entered with iDrive:

7. Select "Add device" and press the control-

ler.

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.

Depending on the mobile phone, approx.

30 seconds are available for entering the

Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone

and on the Control Display.

9. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the

controller.

10. Wait a few seconds until the list of the

logged-on mobile phones is shown on the

Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

To cancel the logon of the mobile phone on the

vehicle:

Select "Refuse connection" and press the con-

troller.

The next time you use the mobile phone in the

vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max-

imum of two minutes with the engine running or

the ignition switched on.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the

vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the

SIM card or on your mobile phone are trans-

ferred to your vehicle, refer to the operating

instructions of your mobile phone if necessary.

This transfer depends on your mobile phone,

refer to the operating instructions of your

mobile phone if necessary, and can take several

minutes.

Up to four mobile phones can be logged on

consecutively. If you log on a fifth mobile phone,

the logon data of the last mobile phone in the

list will be deleted, refer to below.

List of logged-on mobile phones

All mobile phones for which the vehicle has

stored the logon data can be displayed. If sev-

eral logged-on mobile phones are detected by

the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the

mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi-

cle.

You can change the order of the mobile phones

in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected

in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper-

ated via the vehicle.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start

menu.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press

the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

165

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-

troller.

The selected mobile phone is move upward

by one position.

Logging mobile phone off vehicle

If you no longer want to operate your mobile

phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon

data of the mobile phone.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start

menu.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press

the controller.

7. Select "Delete device" and press the con-

troller.

The logged-off mobile phone is deleted

from the list.

The phone book entries you have trans-

ferred from your mobile phone to your vehi-

cle are also deleted in the process.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link

Bluetooth technology is not approved in

all countries. Observe the applicable local

regulations. Temporarily disconnect the Blue-

tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile

phone if necessary.<

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot

operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and

the mobile phone can use other devices with a

Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link

between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. Remove the mobile phone from the snap-in

adapter and switch it off.

2. Press the button to open the start

menu.

3. Select the menu and press the controller.

4. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

166

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

the Bluetooth link is activated.

7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"

and press the controller to activate or deac-

tivate the link.

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired

volume.

This volume for the handsfree system is main-

tained, even if the other audio sources are set to

minimum volume.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on

the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Operation via iDrive

You can operate the following functions via

iDrive:

>Dial the phone number.

>Dial phone numbers from the phone book.

>Select stored phone numbers, e.g. from the

list of accepted calls.

>Hang up.

With the ignition and radio readiness switched

off, e.g. after removing the remote control, you

can continue an ongoing call for a maximum of

25 minutes via the handsfree system.

Requirements

The logon data of the mobile phone are stored

in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to

operate.

The engine is running or the ignition is switched

on.

The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to open

"Communication".

Receiving calls

If you have the phone number of the caller

stored in the phone book and the phone num-

ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry

is displayed.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

167

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Accepting a call

Select "Accept" and press the controller.

Rejecting a call

Select "Reject" and press the controller.

The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has

been activated.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing

the individual digits and pressing the con-

troller.

Always enter the complete phone number

consisting of national dialing code, area

code, and phone number.

The letters correspond to the digits on the

keypad of the mobile phone.

To delete an incorrect character:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.

4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-

ler.

Ending a call

1. Select the phone number and press the

controller.

2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Dialing a phone number from phone

book or a phone number stored in a list

Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls

and the entries of the phone book are stored in

lists when the mobile phone is connected to the

vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in

the phone book, the name of the entry is dis-

played instead of the phone number.

You can select the desired subscriber from the

list and establish the connection.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

168

Five lists are available:

>"A - Z"

The entries of the mobile-phone phone

book, consisting of the name and phone

number, are sorted alphabetically.

>"Top 8"

The eight numbers called most frequently

from the phone book "A - Z" are automati-

cally stored in the Top 8 list. The list is

sorted according to frequency.

>"Redial"

The last eight phone numbers you have

dialed are automatically stored. The last

number dialed is at the top of the list.

>"Missed calls"

The phone numbers of the last eight calls

which were not accepted are stored. This

requires the telephone number of the caller

to have been sent.

>"Received calls"

The phone numbers of the last eight

accepted calls are stored. This requires the

telephone number of the caller to have been

sent.

Dialing phone numbers from phone

book

The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book

entries. The phone book entries appear on the

Control Display.

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. To limit the number of displayed entries,

select the first letter of the desired entry and

press the controller.

4. Select the desired entry and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller.

The system dials the number.

If different phone numbers are stored in the

mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and

home, the name is shown once for each phone

number.

You can change a phone number stored in the

phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

5. Change the phone number.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-

ler.

Dialing phone numbers stored in a list

To select an entry and establish a connection:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select list and press the controller:

>"Top 8"

>"Redial"

>"Missed calls"

>"Received calls"

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

169

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

3. Select the desired entry and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "Call" and press the controller.

The system dials the number.

Deleting individual entries

1. Select the desired entry from the list and

press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.

The entry is deleted.

Deleting the entire list

1. Select an entry from the list and press the

controller.

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the

controller.

3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the

controller.

The list is deleted.

Touch tone dialing

The touch tone code is required for access to

network services or for controlling devices, e.g.

remote checking of an answering machine.

This function is available when a connection

has been established.

1. Establish connection.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Keypad" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired character

and press the

controller.

Each character is sent immediately and

confirmed by a tone depending the mobile

phone model.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

170

Changing between mobile

phone and handsfree system

From mobile phone to handsfree

system

You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-

tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys-

tem when the motor is running or the ignition is

switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,

the system automatically switches over to the

handsfree mode.

For mobile phones that do not automatically

switch over to the handsfree mode:

>You may also be able to continue the con-

versation via the handsfree system,

depending on the mobile phone used.

Follow the instructions displayed on the

mobile phone display, refer to the operating

instructions of your mobile phone.

>Press the button above the storage

compartment. Switching over may take

several seconds.

From handsfree system to mobile

phone

When you telephone via the handsfree system,

you can also continue the call via the mobile

phone if necessary, depending on the mobile

phone model. Follow the instructions displayed

on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-

ating instructions of your mobile phone.

Operation by voice*

The concept

You can operate your mobile phone without

having to remove your hands from the steering

wheel. When making your entries, you will be

assisted by announcements and questions in

many cases.

The same prerequisites as for operation via

iDrive apply, refer to page 166.

Symbols in Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

An acoustic signal indicates that you can

say commands.

2. Say the command.

The text or numbers that the voice com-

mand system has registered will appear on

the Control Display.

Ending/canceling operation by voice

Press the button on the steering wheel

or

In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,

e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the

button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud

The system understands default commands

that must be spoken word for word.

You can have the system read aloud the possi-

ble commands at any point:

Using alternative commands

There are often a number of commands to run a

function, e.g.:

The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.

You can say each digit individually or group

them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

{...} Say the specified commands word for

word.

{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

171

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Example: dialing phone numbers

Start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Adjusting volume

You can adjust the volume for the instructions

from the system:

Turn the button during an instruction to select

the desired volume.

This volume for the instructions is maintained,

even if the other audio sources are set to mini-

mum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

Correcting phone number

After the last spoken sequence of digits has

been repeated by the system, you can delete

this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be

repeated as often as you like.

Deleting input

{Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered

so far.

Voice phone book

Operating by voice command requires a per-

sonal voice phone book.

>On vehicles with separate drives for audio

CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are

automatically adopted from your mobile

phone's memory.

>On vehicles with a shared drive for audio

CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries must

be entered by voice and are independent of

your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it

is not possible to use voice command either

to call phone numbers stored in the mobile

phone or to store new numbers.

Command Response

{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890}{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}

{Dial}{{Dialing number}}

1. {Dial number}.

The dialog for establishing a telephone

connection is opened.

2. Say the phone number.

For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}

and then the country code.

3. {Dial}.

The connection to the desired sub-

scriber is established.

{Correct number}.

The digits are deleted.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

172

Creating and editing voice phone

book*

Save entry:

An entry always consists of a name and phone

number.

Delete entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone

book.

Delete all entries:

{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the

phone book.

Have entries read aloud and select:

You can have all the entries of your voice phone

book read aloud in the order of input and select

a certain entry to establish a connection:

Selecting an entry

The connection to the phone number of the

selected entry is established.

Redialing

The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".

Notes

The commands in English were available

as of this printing. Other languages are

currently not available. To operate the mobile

phone via the voice command system, refer to

page 22.<

Important for voice commands

For voice commands, keep the following in

mind:

>Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-

mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis

and pauses.

>Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof

closed to prevent interference from ambi-

ent noise.

>Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.

1. {Save name}.

The dialog for storing a name is

opened.

2. Speak name and repeat entry upon

request.

The spoken length of the names in the

phone book must not exceed approx.

2seconds.

3. Say the phone number when prompted.

4. To store the phone number:

{Save}.

1. {Delete name}.

The dialog for deleting an entry is

opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phone book}.

The dialog for deleting phone book is

opened.

2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the repeated prompt with

{Yes}.

1. {Read phone book}.

The dialog for reading phone book is

opened.

2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is

read aloud.

1. {Dial name}.

The dialog for selecting an entry is

opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

173

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Mounting/removing snap-in

adapter

1. Press the area 1 around the button and

remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and

press down until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter:

Press the area 1 around the button.

Inserting mobile phone

1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile

phone's antenna connector if necessary, so

that the mobile phone can engage in the

snap-in adapter.

2. With the keys facing upward, press the

mobile phone toward the electrical connec-

tions and press down until it engages.

The mobile phone's battery is charged with the

ignition switch at radio readiness or higher or

with the steering unlocked.

To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid

using the phone when the ignition is

switched off.<

Removing mobile phone

Press button.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

TeleService, BMW Assist

174

TeleService , BMW Assist

TeleService

TeleService assists you when communicating

with a BMW center. The built-in car phone can

be used to transmit data regarding the service

status of your vehicle or regarding legally man-

dated inspections directly to your BMW center.

This is the same data that is also stored in the

remote control for CBS Condition Based Ser-

vice. Your BMW center can then contact you,

and you can make a convenient appointment

while your BMW center can prepare in advance

for the required maintenance work. The Tele-

Service functions are country-specific: the data

regarding the service status of your vehicle or

regarding legally mandated inspections is

transmitted on a country-specific basis either

automatically before they fall due or during your

calls to the BMW center. Your BMW center will

be glad to provide more detailed information.

BMW Assist

BMW Assist provides you with other services in

addition to TeleService. For example, the posi-

tion data of your vehicle can be transferred to

the BMW Assist response center if an emer-

gency call

*

has been initiated.

Many functions of BMW Assist depend on the

individually agreed contract. Data transmission,

e.g. of the CBS Condition Based Service, dif-

fers from country to country.

The contract of participation with BMW Assist

and the activation must be completed before

you can use BMW Assist.

When the contract expires, the car phone can

be deactivated by a BMW center without your

having to visit a BMW center. Following deacti-

vation of the car phone, no emergency calls can

be made. The car phone can be reactivated

after signing a new contract with a BMW center.

You can also use the services of BMW Assist via

the Internet. The range of services is continually

being expanded.

Requirements

You can use TeleService or BMW Assist when

the following requirements are met:

>The installed car phone is logged on to a

cellular telephone network. This network

must be capable of transmitting the ser-

vices.

>To transmit position data, the vehicle must

be able to determine the current position.

This can be displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

>For TeleService or BMW Assist to be acti-

vated and updated, the GPS signal must be

available.

>You have applied for BMW Assist through

your BMW center or BMW Customer Sup-

port.

Enabling TeleService or BMW Assist

For you to be able to use the services of

TeleService or BMW Assist, these must be

enabled.

Requirements

>Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current location. Reception is best when

you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

>Leave radio readiness switched on while

connecting to the system.

Enabling

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

**

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

175

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-

troller.

TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist

are enabled; data exchange with the service

center starts.

Enabling takes a few minutes. The status is

displayed on the Control Display. If you open

another menu, the enable process continues to

run in the background.

Services offered

The following special features apply for the ser-

vices of TeleService and BMW Assist:

>The services offered are country-specific.

>Voice contact is established or data are

transferred, depending on the equipment

and the country. In some countries, it is

possible to do both.

>The data transferred can be the vehicle

data, your current position or the data of the

CBS Condition Based Service.

Automatic service notification*

The data on the service status of your vehicle or

on legally mandated inspections is transmitted

automatically directly to your BMW center prior

to the due date. You can check when the BMW

center was notified.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service notification" and press the

controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

TeleService, BMW Assist

176

Breakdown assistance

You can call Roadside Assistance

*

of the

BMW Group should you require help in the

event of a breakdown.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select

"Communication".

3. Select "BMW Assist" and press the control-

ler.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press

the controller.

If the current position can be determined,

the current vehicle location is displayed.

6. Select "Start service" and press the con-

troller.

Contact with Roadside Assistance will be

established.

Establishing contact with your BMW

center or BMW Customer Relations

You can contact your BMW center, e.g. to

arrange a service appointment.

For information related to your vehicle, call the

BMW Customer Relations.

This requires your mobile phone to be logged

onto the vehicle.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con-

troller.

5. Select desired BMW service:

>"Service Request"

>"Customer Relations"

6. Press the controller.

7. Select "Start service" and press the con-

troller.

Contact with the desired BMW service will be

established.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

177

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Adapting TeleService or

BMW Assist

Displaying and updating services

If the offering from TeleService or BMW Assist

changes, you will be notified. In this case you

should update the services.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-

troller.

The current services available from

TeleService or BMW Assist are displayed.

6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the

controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the

controller.

Terminating services

If you block the services, the connection to

BMW Assist is deactivated.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con-

troller.

6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the

controller.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the

controller.

The use of TeleService or BMW Assist is

blocked, and the current vehicle position will

not be transferred during an emergency call

*

.

To deactivate the blocking function, enabling

must be carried out again, refer to page 174.

This does not affect the contractual agree-

ments.

The automatic service notification can be dis-

abled separately. Please contact your BMW

center for this purpose.

Re-enable TeleService and, if applicable,

BMW Assist to log on again.

Displaying vehicle data

When TeleService or BMW Assist is activated,

the license plate and the vehicle identification

number of your vehicle can be displayed.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and

press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Profile" and press the controller.

To adjust the license plate number, please con-

tact your BMW center.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

TeleService, BMW Assist

178

BMW Contact*

If you are not activated for BMW Assist, you can

display several service phone numbers:

>Roadside Assistance

*

of the BMW Group

when you require breakdown assistance

>BMW center, e.g. when you want to make

an appointment for service

>BMW Hotline

*

, for information on all

aspects of your vehicle

If BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 175.

You can select the displayed service phone

number if your mobile phone is logged on in the

vehicle:

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select

"Communication".

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press

the controller.

5. Select one of the following menu items and

press the controller:

>"Roadside Assistance"

>"Customer Relations"

>"Service Request"

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

Contact is established.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

179

EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

This section helps you maintain your

mobility by supplying important information

on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and

breakdown assistance.

Mobility

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Refueling

182

Refueling

Always switch off the engine before refu-

eling; otherwise, no fuel can be dispensed

into the tank and a message is displayed.<

When handling fuel, always observe all

applicable precautionary measures and

regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-

tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause

an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Fuel filler door

To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of

the fuel filler door.

Manual release

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can

release the fuel filler door manually:

In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with

the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.

Observe following when refueling

When handling fuels always follow any

safety guidelines posted at the gas sta-

tion.<

Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler door.

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-

pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting the filler nozzle

during refueling

>results in premature pump shutoff

>can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuel-

vapor recovery system

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks

off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 18.5 US gallons/70 liters, including the

reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 gallons/8 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your

remaining range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not

ensured and damage can occur.<

Fuel filler cap

Closing

Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is

a clearly audible click.

Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel

filler cap between the fuel filler cap and

the vehicle. A message is displayed if the cap is

loose or missing.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

183

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Fuel specifications

Never used leaded gasoline; it will perma-

nently damage the catalytic converter.<

Required fuel

Premium unleaded gasoline

The minimum Octane Rating is 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum Octane

Rating, the engine may produce knocking

sounds when starting at high outside tempera-

tures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum Octane Rating corresponds to the

Anti Knock Index AKI and is determined accord-

ing to the so-called (R+M)/2 method.

Use high-quality brands

Field experience has demonstrated significant

differences in fuel quality: volatility, composi-

tion, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for

sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels

containing up to and including 10% ethanol or

other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by

weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol

plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will

not void the applicable warranties with respect

to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

problems relating to drivability and start-

ing, and to a tendency to stall, especially under

certain environmental conditions such as high

ambient temperature and high altitude.

Should you encounter drivability problems,

which you suspect could be related to the fuel

you are using, we recommend that you respond

by switching to a recognized high-quality

brand.

Failure to comply with these recommendations

may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

184

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure

Information for your safety

The condition of the tires and the maintenance

of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only

to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-

fort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure

Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires

are cold. This means after a maximum of

1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has

been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are

warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

and correct it as needed: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. If you fail

to observe this precaution, you may be driving

on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-

tion that can not only compromise your vehi-

cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-

age and the risk of an accident.<

After correcting the inflation pressure(s),

always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,

refer to page 88.<

Pressure specifications

The tables below provide all the correct inflation

pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient

temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire

sizes and tire brands respectively

approved and recommended by BMW; a list

of these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla-

tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-

ing:

>Tire sizes for your vehicle

>Load conditions

>Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving

up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h

adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation

pressures listed on the following pages in the

column for traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving

comfort.

These pressure specifications can be found on

the door post when you open the driver's door.

The permissible top speed for these tire

inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.

Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire dam-

age and accidents may result.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving

above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please

note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column

of the table on the following pages and adjust

your tire inflation pressures as needed.

Otherwise tire damage and accidents could

occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed

limits, otherwise violations of the law could

occur.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

185

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Tire inflation pressures for the 650i Coupe

Tire inflation pressures for the 650i Convertible

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds

up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds

including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications

in the table are indicated in

psi/kilopascal with cold tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S

245/50 R 17 99 H M+S 30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W

Rear: 275/40R1899W 30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W

Rear: 275/35R1996W 30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W

Rear: 275/30R2093Y 30/210 33/230 30/210 33/230 33/230 39/270

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 210.

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds

up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds

including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications

in the table are indicated in

psi/kilopascal with cold tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S

245/50 R 17 99 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W

Rear: 275/40R1899W 32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W

Rear: 275/35R1996W 32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W

Rear: 275/30R2093Y 32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 210.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

186

Tire identification marks

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire

makes it easier to identify and choose the right

tires.

Tire size

Speed letter

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of

the U.S. Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire age

The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on

the sidewall:

DOT ... 3305 indicates that a tire was manufac-

tured in week 33 of the year 2005.

BMW recommends replacing all tires at least

every 6 years, even if some tires may last for

10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Tread wear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm due to varia-

tions in driving habits, service practices and dif-

ferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C.

These grades represent the tire's ability to stop

on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test sur-

faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-

nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-

teristics.<

e.g.

Nominal width in mm

Aspect ratio in Ξ

Radial belt type

Rim diameter in inches

Load rating number

not on ZR tires

Speed code letter

before the R on ZR tires

245/45 R 18 96 W

e.g.

Manufacturer code

for tire make

Tire size and tire design

Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 3305

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

187

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to

a level of performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC – run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular

symbol containing the letters RSC on the side

of the tire, refer to page 188.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires.

These have better winter properties than sum-

mer tires.

Tire condition

Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,

signs of damage and foreign objects lodged in

the tread, and check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth

The tread depth should not fall below 0.12 in/

3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-

tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of

0.063 in/1.6 mm.

At tread depths below 0.12 in/3 mm, there is an

increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning,

even when only small amounts of water are

present on the road surface.

Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for

winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm.

New tires should be mounted in the interest of

safety.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer

to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-

ference and are marked on the side of the tire

with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread

is worn down to the wear indicators, then the

legally permissible tread depth limit of 0.063 in/

1.6 mm has been reached.

Wheel/tire damage

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,

tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-

tible to road hazards and consequential dam-

ages.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal

vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or

some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-

ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These

kinds of problems may also be signaled by other

changes in vehicle response, such as a strong

tendency to pull to the left or right.

In these cases reduce your speed imme-

diately and have the wheels and tires

inspected immediately. To do this, carefully

drive to the nearest BMW center or a special-

ized tire dealer that works in accordance with

BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained

personnel. Have the vehicle towed to the repair

shop if necessary. Tire damage can be

extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and

other road users.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Wheels and tires

188

Run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular

symbol containing the letters RSC on the side

of the tire.

Run-flat tires consist of self-contained tires and

special rims. The sidewall reinforcement

ensures that the tire retains some residual

safety in the event of pressure drop and driving

remains possible to a restricted degree.

For continued driving with damaged tires, refer

to Indication of a flat tire, page 89.

New wheels and tires

Only have new wheels and tires mounted

by a BMW center or a repair shop that

works in accordance with BMW guidelines and

uses appropriately trained personnel. If this

work is performed inexpertly, there is a danger

of damage and associated safety risks. Make

sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tires

BMW does not recommend the use of

retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety

may be reduced. Potentially substantial varia-

tions in the design and the age of the carcasses

can result in a reduced service life.<

The right wheels and tires

BMW recommends that you use only

wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular

vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-

turing tolerances mean that even wheels and

tires with identical official size ratings could

actually have different dimensions than the

approved units – these differences could lead to

body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-

dents.If non-approved wheels and tires are

used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,

and therefore cannot be held liable for driving

safety.<

You can find out the right wheel-tire combina-

tion from your BMW center.

The right wheel-and-tire combination is

another vital factor in ensuring reliable opera-

tion of various vehicle systems such as ABS

and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle

response, use only tires of a single tread config-

uration from a single manufacturer. After a tire is

damaged, always remember to have the original

wheel and tire combination remounted on the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

BMW recommends particular tire brands for

each tire size. You can recognize these from the

clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.

With proper use, these tires meet the highest

standards for safety and handling characteris-

tics.

Run-flat tires

When installing new tires or when changing

from summer tires to winter tires, for your own

safety, use run-flat tires. No spare wheel is pro-

vided in the event of a flat. Your BMW center will

be glad to advise you.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends

that you do not have damaged run-flat

tires repaired; they should be replaced.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

189

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Special characteristics of winter tires

BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold

winter driving conditions. Although all-season

M+S tires provide better winter traction than

summer tires, they generally fail to provide the

same levels of cold-weather performance as

winter tires.

Watch speed

Always observe the maximum permissi-

ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise

tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-

dents.<

Storage

Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry

place with as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil,

grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum

tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall

of the tire.

Snow chains*

BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,

classifies them as road-safe and recommends

them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-

mation.

These snow chains are approved exclusively for

use in pairs on the rear wheels with the tire size:

>245/50 R 17 Y

>245/45 R 18 Y

Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions

when installing snow chains. Do not exceed a

vehicle speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with the

chains installed.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after

installing snow chains as this could cause

the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction.

When you are driving with snow chains, it can

be beneficial to switch off DTC briefly, refer to

page 87.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Under the hood

190

Under the hood

Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without

the required professional technical training. If

you are unfamiliar with the specifications to be

observed, only have work carried out on your

vehicle by a BMW center or a repair shop that

works in accordance with BMW guidelines and

uses appropriately trained personnel. Other-

wise there is a danger of damage and associ-

ated safety risks if this work is performed

improperly.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood with momentum, releasing it

from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm. It must be

clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may

result.

If you see any signs that the hood is not com-

pletely closed while you are driving your vehicle,

you should stop at once and close it securely.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

191

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Engine compartment

1Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Topping off

engine oil

2Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath the

microfilter cover, refer to page 193

3Jump-starting terminal, refer to page 203

4Washer fluid reservoir of the headlamp and

windshield cleaning systems, refer to

page 66

5Expansion tank for coolant, refer to

page 193

Engine oil

Engine oil consumption depends on driving

style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil

level check.

The condition for the most accurate indication

of the oil level possible is measurement with the

engine at operating temperature, i.e. following

an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.

You can display the oil level on the Control Dis-

play while driving or when stopped on a level

surface with the engine running.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Under the hood

192

4. Select "Service requirements" and press

the controller.

5. Select "Engine oil level" and press the con-

troller. The oil level is displayed.

Possible messages

>"Engine oil level O.K."

>"No measured value available: Updating

engine oil level measurement...":

Engine oil level is being measured. This

process can take approx. 3 minutes when

stopped on a level surface and approx.

5 minutes while driving.

>"Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart

engine oil.":

Add 1 quart/liter of engine oil at the next

opportunity.

>"Engine oil level too high":

Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately; otherwise, engine damage may

result if too much oil has been added.<

>"Please observe recalculated service inter-

val for engine oil":

Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is

possible. To do this, observe the recalcu-

lated remaining mileage until the next oil

change service, refer to page 195. Have the

system checked as soon as possible.

Topping off engine oil

Do not add 1 quart/1 liter of oil until a corre-

sponding message appears on the Control Dis-

play.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,

otherwise engine damage could result.<

Continuous contact with used oil has

caused cancer in laboratory tests.

For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas

of skin with soap and water after such work.

Keep oil, grease, etc. out of reach of children

and heed warnings on containers. Failure to do

so could pose health risks.<

Oil change

Have oil changes carried out only by a BMW

center or a repair shop that works in accordance

with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately

trained personnel.

Approved engine oils

The quality of the engine oil selected has critical

significance for the operation and service life of

an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-

cific oils after confirming their suitability for use

in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Use only approved BMW High Performance

Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is

unavailable, you can add small quantities of

other synthetic oils between oil changes. Use

only oils of the specification API SH or higher.

Your BMW center will be happy to answer

detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-

mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic

oils.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

193

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

You can also call BMW of North America at

1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at

www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Do not use oil additives; under some

circumstances, they can harm your

engine.<

Viscosity grades

The viscosity is a measure of the thickness of

the oil and is specified in SAE grades.

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on

the climatic conditions in the region in which

you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the SAE grades

5W-40 and 5W-30.<

These oils can be used for driving at all outside

temperatures.

Coolant

Do not open the cooling system when the

engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause

burns.<

Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.

Not all commercially available additives are suit-

able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for

suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may result. The additives

present a health hazard.<

Always observe all applicable environ-

mental laws and regulations when dis-

posing of used coolant additives.<

Checking coolant level

1. The engine must be at ambient tempera-

ture.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-

clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-

sure to escape, then continue turning to

open.

3. The coolant level is correct when it lies

between the Min and Max mark, also refer to

the drawing next the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to

the specified level – do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until it clicks.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-

nated as soon as possible.

Brake system

Malfunction

Brake fluid

The warning lamp lights up in red

in spite of the handbrake being

released; a message appears on the

Control Display.

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to

below the minimum level. At the same time, a

significantly longer brake pedal path may be

noticeable. Have the system checked immedi-

ately by a BMW center.

Warning lamp for Canadian models.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Under the hood

194

When you continue driving, an increased

brake pedal path can be necessary, and

significantly longer braking distances may be

required. Please adapt your driving style

accordingly.<

Brake pads

The warning lamp lights up in red

in spite of the handbrake being

released; a message appears on the

Control Display.

The brake pads have reached their minimum

pad thickness. Have the brake pads replaced as

soon as possible.

Warning lamp for Canadian models.

For your own safety: use only brake pads

that BMW has approved for your particu-

lar vehicle model. As BMW cannot assess the

suitability of other brake pads for use on your

vehicle, BMW is unable to assume continued

responsibility for the vehicle's operating safety

if non-approved pads are installed.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

195

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Maintenance

The BMW Maintenance

System

The BMW Maintenance System supports the

preservation of the traffic and operating safety

of your BMW. The service schedule also

includes operations related to the vehicle's

comfort and convenience features, such as

replacement of the filters for the inside air.

The ultimate objective is to ensure economical

maintenance by providing the ideal service for

your vehicle.

Should the day come when you decide to sell

your BMW, you will find that a complete dealer

service history is an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service

Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-

ent driving conditions of your BMW into

account. Condition Based Service uses this to

determine the current and future service

requirements. By letting you define a service

and maintenance regimen that reflects your

own individual requirements, the system builds

the basis for trouble-free driving.

You can set the Control Display to show

remaining distances and times of selected

maintenance intervals and legally mandated

deadlines, refer to page 77:

>Engine oil

>Brakes, front and rear separately

>Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

>Brake fluid

>Spark plugs

>Vehicle check

>Legally required tests depending on local

regulations

Service data in remote control

Your vehicle stores this information continu-

ously in the remote control while the vehicle is

being driven. After accessing the data stored in

the remote control, your BMW Service Advisor

can suggest precisely the right array of service

procedures for your own individual vehicle.

For this reason, when you take your vehicle in

for service, you should give the BMW Service

Advisor the remote control last used to drive it.

Make sure the date in the iDrive is always

set correctly, refer to page 83; otherwise,

the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Ser-

vice is not ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models and

Warranty and Service Guide Booklet

for Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models and Warranty

and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

for additional information on service require-

ments.

Have service and repair operations per-

formed at your BMW center.

Take the time to ensure that these service pro-

cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-

cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models and Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models. These entries

verify that your vehicle has received the speci-

fied regular maintenance, and may also be

required when submitting warranty claims.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Maintenance

196

Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnostics interface

A diagnostics device can use the OBD socket to

check components critical to exhaust composi-

tion.

This socket is located under a cover on the left

side of the driver's footwell, directly under the

dashboard.

Exhaust-gas values

The warning lamp lights up. The

exhaust-gas values are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.

Display of the previously described

malfunction on Canadian models.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This

is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In

this case, you should reduce speed and drive to

the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.

Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage

to the emission-relevant components, espe-

cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-

ened, the OBD system can detect the

escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to

light up. If the cap is then tightened, the display

should go out within a few days.<

Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-

eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a

device for recording or transmitting certain

vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-

scribed to a BMW Assist plan, then certain vehi-

cle data can be transmitted or recorded to

enable corresponding services.

Care

Important information on care and maintenance

of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your

vehicle brochure.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

197

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Replacing components

Onboard tool kit

The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage

compartment under the floor mat.

Wiper blade replacement

1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp it firmly.

2. Press the locking tabs together while slid-

ing the wiper blade toward the front to dis-

engage it.

3. Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in

until it audibly clicks into place.

Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-

tion to driving safety. You must be duly diligent

in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the

specified procedures, have the corresponding

work carried out at your BMW center.

Never touch the glass on new bulbs with

your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the

bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a

clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its

metal socket.<

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs

at your BMW center.

Whenever you perform any work on the

electrical system, turn off the electrical

devices involved to prevent short circuits from

occurring.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damage

when replacing bulbs, follow any instructions

provided by the bulb manufacturer.<

When performing maintenance on the head-

lamps, follow the instructions in the separate

Caring for your vehicle brochure.

In the case of bulbs whose replacement

is not described, please consult your

BMW center.<

Xenon lamps

The service life of these lamps is very long and

the probability of a failure is very low, provided

that they are not switched on and off an unusual

number of times. In the unlikely event that one

of these lamps should fail, you can continue

driving under poor visibility conditions by

switching on your fog lamps and proceeding

carefully, where allowed by law.

Have work on the xenon lighting system,

including bulb changes, carried out only

by a BMW center. Due to the high voltage

involved, there is a danger to life and limb when

work is carried out improperly.<

For checking and adjusting headlamp

aim, please contact your BMW center.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Replacing components

198

High beams, parking lamps

The illustration shows the front left side of the

engine compartment.

High beams

Bulb 55 watts, H 7

1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab

and removing the cover cap upward.

2. Press the bulb holder from above to release

it.

3. Remove the bulb holder.

4. Remove and replace the bulb.

The lamp H7 is pressurized; wear eye

protection and protective gloves. Other-

wise, there is the risk of bodily injury if the lamp

is damaged.<

Parking lamps

Bulb 10 watts

Bulb holder and reflector are one unit and

are replaced together.<

1. Turn the bulb holder 2 to the right and

remove.

2. Press the snap connection on the plug con-

nector, pull off the bulb holder and replace.

Front turn signal, sidemarker

Your BMW is equipped with two turn signal

lamps per side in the front.

Turn signal lamp 1

Bulb 21 watts, WY 21 SV

The illustration shows the front right side of the

engine compartment.

1. Press the lever shown:

>downward for the right turn signal

>upward for the left turn signal

2. Remove the bulb holder towards the rear.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Turn signal lamp 2

Bulb 21 watts, WY 21 SV

The bulb for the turn signal lamp 2 can be

replaced via the wheel well.

The illustration shows the front left side of the

vehicle.

1. Turn the steering all the way to be able to

remove the cover, refer to illustration.

2. Turn off the light, switch off the ignition and

remove the remote control from the ignition

lock.

3. Unscrew the two bolts using the open-end

wrench from the onboard tool kit, refer to

page 197.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

199

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

4. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove,

refer to arrow.

5. Remove and replace the bulb.

Sidemarker

Bulb 5 watts, WY5W ST

The bulb can be replaced via a cover at the front

of the wheel well, refer to the description for

turn signal lamp 2.

1. The bulb holder of the sidemarker lamp is

located toward the outside of the vehicle

next to the bulb holder of turn signal lamp 2.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Side turn signals

Bulb 5 watts, WY 5 W

1. Press against the front edge of the lamp

with the tip of your finger, then push it to the

rear, release the snap connection at the

front and take it off the trim strip.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and

remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Tail lamps

The roadside parking, rear and brake

lamps are LEDs. The backup lamps are

equipped with long-life bulbs. Please contact a

BMW center in case of a malfunction.<

1Turn signals

2Roadside parking, rear and brake lamp

3Backup lamp

4Reflector

Rear turn signals

Bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W

The illustration shows the recess on the left

side of the luggage compartment.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Unclip the bulb holder and remove.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while

turning it to the left for removal and replace-

ment.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Replacing components

200

License plate lamps

Bulb 5 watts, WY 5 W

1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the

lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and

remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Light-emitting diodes LEDs

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-

cent lenses serve as the light source for many of

the controls and displays in your vehicle. These

light-emitting diodes, which operate using a

concept similar to that applied in conventional

lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-

emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several

hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

Changing a wheel

Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a

standard feature. An immediate wheel change

in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer

required.

For continued driving with damaged tires, refer

to Indication of a flat tire, page 89.

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular

symbol containing the letters RSC on the side

of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires on page 188.

If you have new tires mounted or switch from

summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use run-

flat tires because no spare tire is provided in

case of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to

advise you.

Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 188.

The suitable tools for changing tires are

available as accessories from your BMW

center.<

Car jacking points

The jacking points for the car jack are located in

the positions shown.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance

The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the

electrolyte will last for the life of the battery

when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-

mate.

Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all

matters concerning the battery.

Charging battery

Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the

terminals in the engine compartment with the

engine switched off. For the connections, refer

to Jump starting on page 203.

Disposal

After replacement, have old batteries dis-

posed of by your BMW center or deposit

them at a recycling center. Maintain the battery

in an upright position for transport and storage.

Always secure the battery to prevent it from tip-

ping over during transport.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

201

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Power failure

Following a temporary interruption of the power

supply, the operation of some equipment is lim-

ited and must be reinitialized. Individual settings

are also lost and must be updated:

>Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory

The position must be stored again, refer to

page 49.

>Time and Date

The values must be updated, refer to

page 82.

>Radio

Stations must be stored again if necessary,

refer to page 146.

>Navigation system

Wait until the system starts, refer to

page 137.

Fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse, and

do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, as

this could lead to overloading of the wiring, ulti-

mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are

located in the compartment for the onboard tool

kit, refer to page 197.

Information on fuse allocation is located below

the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.

In glove compartment

1. Press the button on the back in the center of

partition 1 and pull out the partition upward,

arrow 2.

2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and

fold the lid 4 forward.

In luggage compartment

Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and

remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit.

Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional

fuses 2 are provided there.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance

202

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency call

Conditions for an emergency call:

>Full mobile phone preparation package

>BMW Assist is activated.

Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 174.

>Radio readiness is activated.

>The car phone is logged on to a cellular

telephone network.

>The emergency call system is operable.

When the contract for your BMW Assist plan

expires, a BMW center can deactivate the car

phone without your having to visit a workshop.

Following deactivation of the car phone, no

emergency calls can be made. The car phone

can be reactivated after signing a new contract

with a BMW center.

Initiating an emergency call

1. Briefly press protective cover to open.

With some vehicle equipment packages or

in the Convertible, the arrangement of the

switches and indicator lamps may differ

somewhat.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as

the voice connection to the BMW Assist

emergency call center has been estab-

lished, the LED flashes.

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until

the connection has been established. You will

then be able to provide a detailed description of

the situation.

If the current location of your vehicle can be

determined, it will be forwarded to the

BMW Assist emergency call center.

If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear

the BMW Assist emergency call center through

the handsfree system, this could indicate, for

instance, that the handsfree system is no longer

operational. But the emergency call center is

still able to hear you.

Under certain conditions, an emergency call is

automatically initiated immediately after a

severe accident. The automatic emergency call

is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the emergency call

cannot be guaranteed under the most

unfavorable conditions.<

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle can be found in the lug-

gage compartment on the left side.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

203

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

First-aid kit*

The first-aid kit is located in the filler element of

the rear seat backrest.

1. Press the button downward and pull the

filler element forward.

2. Take out first-aid kit.

To refit the filler element, insert the two

bottom tabs into the strip and press the

filler element back into place. Make sure that

you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<

Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit

have a limited service life. For this reason, check

the expiration dates of each of the items regu-

larly and replace any whose expiration dates

have passed.

Roadside Assistance*

The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group

offers you assistance in the event of a break-

down around the clock, including on weekends

and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-

tance in your home country can be found in the

BMW Contact directory.

In the case of vehicles with BMW Assist or

TeleService, you can contact the Roadside

Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in

the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,

refer to page 176.

Jump starting

When your battery is discharged, you can use

two jumper cables to start your BMW with

power from the battery in a second vehicle. You

can also use the same method to help start

another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with

fully-insulated clamp handles.

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical

components while the engine is running. Care-

fully adhere to the following sequence, both to

prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to

guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparing

1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and

approximately the same capacitance in Ah.

This information can be found on the bat-

tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the vehicle provid-

ing assistance.

3. Switch off all electrical accessories in both

vehicles.

There must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,

there is a danger of short circuiting.<

Connecting jumper cables

To avoid personal injury from sparks,

follow this sequence when connecting

jumper cables.<

In your BMW, the so-called auxiliary terminal

for jump starting in the engine compartment

serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also

refer to engine compartment overview on

page 191. The cover is marked with a +.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance

204

1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump-

starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+

to the positive terminal of the battery or a

jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid-

ing assistance.

3. Attach the second end of the cable to the

positive terminal of the battery or to a jump-

starting terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–

to the negative terminal of the battery or to

an engine or body ground of the vehicle

providing assistance.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground

or negative terminal.

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the

negative terminal of the battery or to the

engine or body ground of the vehicle to be

started.

Starting engine

1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle

and allow it to run at idle for several minutes

at slightly increased speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the

usual way.

If the first start attempt is not successful,

wait a few minutes before another attempt

in order to allow the discharged battery to

recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing

the connection sequence.

If required, have the battery inspected and

recharged at your BMW center.

Never use spray fluids to start the

engine.<

Tow-starting and towing

Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.<

Do not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using tow fitting

The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit

mounted on the inside of the luggage compart-

ment under the floor mat, refer to page 197, and

should always remain in the vehicle. It can be

screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

Only use the tow fitting that comes with

the vehicle and screw it in as far as possi-

ble. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads.

Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do

not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise

the tow fitting and vehicle can be damaged.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

205

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Access to screw thread

Rectangular cover in bumper:

Press the arrow symbol on the cover.

Front

Rear

Being towed

Make sure that the ignition is switched on,

refer to page 58; otherwise, the low-beam

headlights, tail lights, turn signals and wind-

shield wipers would not be available. If the vehi-

cle electrical system fails, do not tow-start or

tow the vehicle. The electric steering-wheel

lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot

be steered. For information on jump starting,

refer to page 203. There is no power assistance

with the engine stopped. This then requires

increased effort for braking and steering. Active

steering is deactivated and larger steering

wheel movements are required.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-

ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-

tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with

a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Manual transmission

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission

Selector lever in position N.

Do not exceed a towing speed of

45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic

transmission may be damaged.<

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox

Engage selector lever position N with the igni-

tion switched on.

Towing methods

In some countries, towing with tow bars or

ropes in public traffic is not permitted.

Familiarize yourself with the regulations on tow-

ing in the respective country.

With tow bar

The towing vehicle may not be lighter

than the vehicle to be towed; otherwise, it

will not be possible to reliably control vehicle

response.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same

side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-

ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset

angle, please note the following:

>Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be strictly limited during cornering.

>When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will

exert lateral forces, tending to push the

vehicle sideways.

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,

as attachment to other vehicle parts can

lead to damage.<

With tow rope

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make

sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated

stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attach tow ropes to the tow fittings only, as

attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to

damage.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance

206

With tow truck

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck

with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body

and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.<

Tow-starting

If the vehicle electrical system fails, do not

tow-start or tow the vehicle. The electric

steering-wheel lock cannot be unlocked and

the vehicle cannot be steered. Jump starting,

refer to page 203.<

Do not tow-start vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission. Only tow-start vehi-

cles with a catalytic converter when the engine

is cold. It is better to jump-start the engine, refer

to page 203.<

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,

comply with country-specific regulations.

2. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.

3. Shift into 3rd gear, vehicles with SMG, see

below.

4. Tow-start with the clutch completely

depressed and slowly release the clutch.

After the engine starts, immediately

depress the clutch again completely.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow

bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-

ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Vehicles with SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox:

1. Tow-start in selector-lever position N.

2. Select sequential mode. The correct gear

will be selected and engaged automatically.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

207

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

This chapter contains the technical data,

the short commands of the voice command

system and the index, which is the quickest way

to find the information you are looking for.

Reference

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technical data

210

Technical data

Engine specifications

Weights

Never exceed either the approved

axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

650i

Displacement cu in/cmµ292.8/4,799

No. of cylinders 8

Maximum output hp 360

at engine speed rpm 6,300

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 360/488

at engine speed rpm 3,400

650i Coupe 650i Convertible

Curb weight lbs./kg 3,814/1,730 4,277/1,940

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 4,652/2,110 5,049/2,290

Load lbs./kg 838/380 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,337/1,060 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,491/1,130 2,778/1,260

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 10.6/300

>with raised convertible top com-

partment floor, refer to page 35

cu ft/l – 12.4/350

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

211

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Coupe: dimensions

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Technical data

212

Convertible: dimensions

Capacities

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

Notes

Fuel tank gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel specification: page 183

including reserve of: gal/liters approx. 2.1/8

Window and headlamp

washer system quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5

For details: page 66

Engine oil and filter change quarts/liters 8.5/8.0 BMW High Performance

Synthetic Oil

Oil grades: page 192

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

213

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Short commands of the voice command

system

With short commands you can carry out certain

functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short

commands for the voice command system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}

To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},

{Assistance window map direction of travel},

{Assistance window arrow display},

{Assistance window perspective},

{Assistance window current position},

{Assistance window trip computer} or

{Assistance window onboard info}

To change scale in assistance window 134 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or

{Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function Command

To activate telephone 167 {Phone}

To dial phone number 167 {Dial number}

To display the phone book 167 {A to Z}

To dial from phone book 167 {Call ...} or

{Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 168 {Top 8}

To redial 168 {Redial}

To display "Received calls" 168 {Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 168 {Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 163 {Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist 174 {BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" 176 {BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 178 {BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 176 {BMW Contact numbers}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Short commands of the voice command system

214

Navigation

Onboard info

Function Command

To select navigation 121 {Navigation}

To open "Enter address" 121 {Enter address}

To open "New destination" 121 {New destination}

To display "Input map" 125 {Input map}

To display destination list 127 {Destination list}

To display the address book 128 {Address book}

To display the route criteria 130 {Route preference}

To start destination guidance 132 {Start guidance}

To end destination guidance 132 {Stop guidance}

To display arrow display 133 {Arrow display}

To display map view 133 {Map},{Map facing north},

{Map direction of travel} or

{Perspective}

To change scale 134 {Scale ... miles} or

{Scale ... feet}

To display streets and towns/cities of the

route 134

{Route list}

To switch on voice instructions 135 {Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 135 {Navigation info on}

To repeat voice instructions 135 {Repeat navigation info}

To open route 130, 134 {Route}

To display current position 136 {Current Position}

Function Command

To open "Car Data" 76 {Car data}

To display the computer 76 {Onboard info}

To display the trip computer 76 {Trip computer}

To set the speed limit 81 {Limit}

To start the stopwatch 81 {Stopwatch}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

215

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Entertainment

Function Command

Tone control 141 {Audio}

To switch on radio 144 {Radio on},

{FM on} or

{AM on}

To open "FM" 144 {FM menu}

To open "AM" 144 {AM menu}

To open "All stations" 144 {FM All stations}

To select the radio station 144 {Station ...} or

{Choose station}

To open "Presets" 144 {FM presets} or

{AM presets}

To select stored radio station 144 {Choose preset}

To open "Manual" 145 {FM manual},

{AM manual} or

{Choose frequency},

{Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open the radio station with the best

reception 145

{AM Autostore}

To open "WB" 148 {Weatherband menu}

To switch on weatherband 148 {Weatherband on}

To select a weatherband station 148 {Choose weatherband station}

To open "SAT" 150 {SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 150 {SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 151 {SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 150 {SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 150 {SAT radio categories}

To select CD player 153 {CD menu}

To switch on CD player 153 {CD}

To select CD changer 153 {CD-changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 153 {CD-changer}

To select a CD 153 {CD 1...6}

To select music track 154 {CD track ...}

To select CD and track 154 {CD 1...6 track ...}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Short commands of the voice command system

216

Climate

menu

Function Command

To open "Vent settings" 102 {Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 101 {Automatic programs}

To open "Parked car ventilation" 104 {Parked car operation}

To open "Automatic ventilation" 104 {Automatic ventilation}

To display the activation times 104 {Activation time}

Function Command

To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" {Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 65, 96 {Lighting}

To open "Communication settings" 174 {Communication settings}

To open "BMW Service settings" 174 {BMW Service settings}

To open "BMW Service" 176 {BMW service}

To open "Service requirements" 77, 175 {Service requirements}

To open "Service" 77, 175 {Service}

To display "Check Control messages" 79 {Check Control messages}

To open "Display settings" 82 {Display settings}

To open "Head-Up Display" 94 {Head-up display}

To activate speed limit 81 {Limit on}

To deactivate speed limit 81 {Limit off}

To adjust the brightness of the Control

Display 83

{Brightness}

To open "Units" 83 {Units}

To open "Languages" 84, 135 {Language}

To open "Time" 82 {Time}

To open "Date" 83 {Date}

To open "PDC" 85 {PDC}

To open "FTM" 88 {FTM}

To open "Entertainment settings" 141 {Entertainment settings}

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

217

Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Everything from A to Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display

texts used to select

individual functions, and

indicates where to find them

in the text.

A

ABS Antilock Brake

System 86

ACC, refer to Active cruise

control 67

Acceleration assistant with

SMG 64

Accessories 6

Activated-charcoal filter 104

Activating hour signal 83

"Activation time" for parked

car ventilation 104

Active cruise control 67

– Indicator lamp 70

– radar sensor 71

– selecting distance 69

– warning lamps 71

Active steering 90

– warning lamp 90

Adapter for spare key 28

Adaptive brake lamps, refer to

Brake force display 90

Adaptive Head Light 97

"Add digits" for mobile

phone 168

"Address book" for

navigation 128

Address for navigation

– deleting 129

– entering 121,124

– selecting 129

– storing 128

– storing current position 128

"Add to address book" 128

"Add to destination

list" 124,125

Adjusting confirmation signals

for locking and unlocking 31

Adjusting the thigh support 48

Adjusting tone in audio mode,

refer to Tone control 141

"After opening door" 50

"After unlocking" 50

Airbags 90

– deactivating, refer to

Exception for front

passenger's seat 56

– sitting safely 47

– warning lamp 92

Air distribution

– automatic 101

– manual 102

Airing, refer to Ventilation 103

Air recirculation, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air

control 103

"Air recirculation on / off" 54

Air vents, refer to

Ventilation 103

Air volume 102

AKI, refer to Fuel

specifications 183

Alarm system 35

– avoiding unintentional

alarms 36

– interior motion sensor 36

– switching off alarm 35

– switching off tilt alarm

sensor and interior motion

sensor 36

– tilt alarm sensor 36

All around the center

console 14

All around the steering

wheel 10

"All channels" 150

"All doors" 30

All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 189

"All stations" on the radio,

selecting 144,147

Alterations, technical, refer to

For your own safety 6

"AM", reception

range 140,144

Antenna for mobile phone 162

Antifreeze

– coolant 193

– washer fluid 66

Antilock Brake System

ABS 86

Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 35

Anti-theft system, refer to

Central locking system 29

Anti-trapping mechanism

– glass sunroof 40

– power windows 39

Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 210

Approved engine oils 192

Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 210

Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 108

Arrival time

– refer to Computer 76

– refer to Starting destination

guidance 132

"Arrow display" during

Navigation 133

Ashtray 109

Assist, refer to

BMW Assist 174

Assistance systems, refer to

Driving stability control

systems 86

Assistance window 20

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

218

"Assist. window off" 21

AUC Automatic recirculated-

air control 103

Audio 140

– controls 140

– switching on/off 140

– tone control 141

– volume 141

"Audio", refer to Tone

control 141

Automatic

– air distribution 101

– air volume 101

– headlamp control 96

– service notification 175

– steering wheel adjustment,

refer to Easy entry/exit 53

– storing stations 145

Automatically switching

between high beams and

low beams, refer to High-

beam assistant 97

Automatic car washes 116

– also refer to Comfort

access 37

– also refer to the Caring for

your vehicle brochure

Automatic climate control 100

– automatic air

distribution 101

– convertible program 101

– switching off 103

Automatic curb monitor 53

Automatic lighting

– refer to Automatic headlamp

control 96

– refer to Daytime driving

lamps 96

– refer to High-beam

assistant 97

– refer to Interior lamps 99

– refer to Pathway lighting 96

"Automatic programs" 101

Automatic recirculated-air

control AUC 103

Automatic station search 145

Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– deactivating selector lever

interlock 63

– Dynamic Driving Control 64

– interlock 62

– kick-down 63

– selector lever lock,

Interlock 62

– shiftlock 62

– towing 205

– tow-starting 206

– with comfort access 37

"Automatic ventilation" 104

AUTO program with

automatic climate

control 101

"Autostore" on the

radio 144,146

Average fuel consumption 75

– setting units 83

Average speed 75

"Avoid ferries" for

navigation 131

Avoid freeways for

navigation 130

"Avoid highways" for

navigation 131

Avoiding unintentional

alarms 36

"Avoid tollroads" for

navigation 131

Axle loads, refer to

Weights 210

"A - Z" 168

B

Backrest contour, refer to

Lumbar support 48

Backrests, refer to Seats 48

Backup lamps

– refer to Reverse gear 61

– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail

lamps 199

"Balance", refer to Tone

control 142

Balance, refer to Tone

control 142

Balance adjustment in audio

mode, right/left 142

Band-aids, refer to First-aid

kit 203

Bass, refer to Tone

control 141

"Bass", tone control 142

Bass, tone control 141

Battery

– disposal 38

– jump starting 203

– refer to Vehicle battery 200

Battery change 38

Being towed 205

Belts, refer to Safety belts 51

Beverage holder, refer to Cup

holders 109

Blower, refer to Air

volume 102

"BMW Assist" 176

BMW Assist 174

– enabling 174

– services offered 175

"BMW Contact" 178

"BMW Contact

Numbers" 178

BMW homepage 4

BMW Maintenance

System 195

"BMW Service" 176

"BMW Service settings" 175

BMW website 4

Bottle holder, refer to Cup

holders 109

Brake Assistant, refer to DBC

Dynamic Brake Control 86

Brake fluid 193

– level 193

– warning lamp 193

Brake force display 90

Brake hydraulic system 193

Brake lamps

– brake force display 90

– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail

lamps 199

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

219

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Brake pads 194

– breaking-in 114

Brakes

– ABS Antilock Brake

System 86

– brake fluid 193

– brake force display 90

– brake pads 194

– breaking-in 114

– CBC Cornering Brake

Control 86

– handbrake 60

Brake system 114

– brake fluid level 193

– brake pads 114,194

– brake rotors 116

– breaking-in 114

– warning lamp 13,193

Brake wear warning

– brake pads 194

– warning lamp 194

Braking

– electronic brake-force

distribution 86

– refer to Braking safely 115

Braking safely 115

Breakdown assistance 176

Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 203

Breaking-in 114

Breaking-in the clutch 114

Breaking-in the

differential 114

"Brightness" 83,94

Brightness of Control

Display 83

Button for starting engine 58

Buttons on steering wheel 11

Bypassing route sections 136

C

California law

– Event Data Recorders 196

California Proposition

65 Warning 6

"Call" 168

Call

– accepting 166

– displaying accepted 168

– ending 167

– in absence 168

– starting 167

Calling

– from phone book 167

– from Top 8 list 168

– redialing 168

Can holder, refer to Cup

holders 109

Capacity of luggage

compartment 210

Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 200

Car care, refer to the Caring

for your vehicle brochure

Car-care products, refer to the

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

"Car data" 76

Care 196

– refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Cargo loading

– securing cargo 117

– stowing cargo 117

– vehicle 116

Caring for artificial leather,

refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Caring for leather, refer to the

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Caring for light-alloy wheels,

refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Caring for plastic, refer to the

Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Caring for the carpet, refer to

the Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Caring for the vehicle finish,

refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Car key, refer to Keys/remote

control 28

Car phone 162

– installation location, refer to

Center armrest 108

– refer to Mobile phone 162

– refer to separate Owner's

Manual

Car radio, refer to Radio 144

Car wash 116

– refer to Before driving into a

car wash 116

– refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

– with comfort access 37

Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 114

"Categories" 151

CBC Cornering Brake

Control 86

CBS Condition Based

Service 195

"CD" 140,153

CD changer 153

– controls 140

– fast forward/reverse 157

– installation location 157

– playing a track 155

– random play sequence 156

– repeating a track 156

– selecting a CD 153

– selecting a track 154

– switching on/off 140

– tone control 141

– volume 141

CD player 153

– controls 140

– fast forward/reverse 157

– playing a track 155

– random play sequence 156

– repeating a track 156

– selecting a track 154

– switching on/off 140

– tone control 141

– volume 141

Center armrest, adjusting

height 108

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

220

Center console 14

"Central locking" 30

Central locking system 29

– comfort access 36

– from inside vehicle 32

Changes, technical, refer to

For your own safety 6

Changing a wheel 200

Changing language on

Control Display 84

Changing units of measure on

Control Display 83

Changing wheels 188

CHECK button 80

Check Control 79

"Check Control

messages" 80

Check Gas Cap 182

Checking air pressure, refer to

Tire inflation pressure 184

Children's seats, refer to

Child-restraint systems 56

Child-restraint fixing system

LATCH 57

Child-restraint systems 56

Chrome parts, care, refer to

the Caring for your vehicle

brochure

Cigarette lighter 110

Cigarette lighter socket, refer

to Connecting electrical

devices 110

Cleaning, refer to the Caring

for your vehicle brochure

"Climate" 101

Clock 74

– 12h/24h mode 83

– setting time and date 82

Closing

– from inside 32

– from outside 30

Closing fuel filler cap 182

Clothes hooks, Coupe 109

Cockpit 10

Cold start, refer to Starting

engine 59

Comfort access 36

– observing in car wash 37

– replacing battery 38

Comfort operation

– windows with comfort

access 37

– with comfort access 37

"Communication" 166,176

"Communication

settings" 174

Compact disc

– refer to CD changer 153

– refer to CD player 153

Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition

lock 58

Compartments, refer to

Storage compartments 108

Compressed audio files 153

Computer 75

– displays on Control

Display 76

– hour signal 83

"Concert hall", refer to Tone

control 142

Condition Based Service

CBS 195

"Confirmation" 31

Connecting car vacuum

cleaner, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 110

Consumption display, refer to

Average fuel

consumption 75

Consumption statistics, refer

to Average fuel

consumption 75

"Continue guidance to

destination?" 132

Control Center, refer to

iDrive 16

Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16

– setting brightness 83

Controller, refer to iDrive 16

Controls, refer to Cockpit 10

Convenience operation

– convertible top 31,32

– glass sunroof 30,32

– windows 30,32

Convertible

– convertible program for

automatic climate

control 101

– opening and closing

windows 38

– rollover protection

system 92

– top 41

– wind deflector 45

Convertible top

– care, refer to the Caring for

your vehicle brochure

– convenience operation 32

– emergency closing 43

– manual closing 43

– opening and closing 42

Coolant 193

– checking level 193

– temperature 74

Cooling, maximum 103

Cornering Brake Control

CBC 86

Country of destination for

navigation 122

Courtesy lamps, refer to

Interior lamps 99

Cruise control 66,67

– active cruise control 67

Cup holders 109

Curb weight, refer to

Weights 210

"Current position" 136

Current position

– displaying 136

– entering 128

– storing 128

"Customer

Relations" 176,178

Cylinders, refer to Engine

data 210

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

221

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

D

Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10

Data

– capacities 212

– dimensions 211

– engine 210

– technical data 210

– weights 210

"Date" 83

Date 74

– setting 83

"Date format" 83

Daytime driving lamps 96

DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 86

"Deactivated" 50

Deactivating selector lever

interlock 63

Decommissioning the vehicle,

refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Defrosting windows 102

Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 102

Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 102

"Delete address book" for

navigation 130

"Delete all numbers" on the

mobile phone 169

"Delete data" for

navigation 130

"Delete" for mobile

phone 169

Destination address

– deleting 129

– entering 121,124

Destination for navigation

– destination list 127

– entry 121

– home address 130

– selecting from address

book 129

– selecting using

information 126

– storing 128

Destination guidance 132

– bypassing route

sections 136

– canceling voice

instructions 55

– changing specified

route 130

– displaying routes 133

– distance and arrival 132

– interrupting 132

– starting 132

– terminating/continuing 132

– voice instructions 135

– volume of voice

instructions 135

Destination list for

navigation 127

Destinations recently driven

to 127

"Details" in audio mode 155

"Dial" for mobile phone 167

"Dial number" 167

"Diamond button" 54

Digital clock 74

Digital radio, refer to High

Definition Radio 148

Dimensions

– Convertible 212

– Coupe 211

Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 64

Direction announcements,

refer to Voice

instructions 135

Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 135

Directory for navigation, refer

to Address book 128

Displacement, refer to Engine

data 210

"Display" 83

Display, refer to iDrive 16

Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 99

"Display off" 21

Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 12

"Display settings" 82

Displays on the windshield,

refer to Head-Up Display 93

Disposal

– battery of remote control

with comfort access 38

– vehicle battery 200

Distance, refer to

Computer 76

Distance control, refer to

Active cruise control 67

"Distance to dest." 76

Distance to destination, refer

to Computer 76

Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance

Control 85

Door entry lighting, refer to

Interior lamps 99

Door key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Door lock 32

"Door locks" 30

Doors

– manual operation 32

– remote control 30

DOT Quality Grades 186

Draft-free ventilation 104

"Driver's door only" 30

Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 96

Driving notes 114

Driving route, refer to

Displaying the route 133

Driving stability control

systems 86

Driving through water 115

Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 114

Drying the air, refer to Cooling

function 102

DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

– indicator lamp 13,87

DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 87

– activating 87

– indicator lamp 13,87

DVD for navigation 120

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

222

Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 86

Dynamic Drive 88

Dynamic Driving Control 64

Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 86

Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 87

E

Easy entry, refer to Getting in

back 51

Easy entry/exit 53

EBV, refer to Electronic brake-

force distribution 86

Eject button, refer to Buttons

on CD player 140

Electrical malfunction

– convertible top 43

– door lock 32

– driver's door 32

– fuel filler door 182

– glass sunroof 41

– luggage compartment lid 34

– storage compartment, hotel

function 33

Electric steering wheel

adjustment 53

Electronic brake-force

distribution 86

Electronic oil level check 191

Emergency assistance, refer

to Roadside Assistance 203

Emergency call 202

Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation

– convertible top 43

– door lock 32

– driver's door 32

– fuel filler door 182

– glass sunroof 41

– hotel function 33

– luggage compartment lid 34

– selector lever interlock,

automatic transmission 63

Emergency release for

luggage compartment lid in

luggage compartment 34

Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 203

"Emission inspect." 78

"Enable services" 175

"End call" 167

Engine

– breaking-in 114

– data 210

– overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 74

– speed 210

– starting 59

– starting, comfort access 36

– starting difficulties 59

– switching off 59

– switching off when equipped

with Automatic transmission

with comfort access 37

Engine compartment 191

Engine coolant 193

Engine oil

– additives 192

– approved oils 192

– electronic oil level check 191

– recommended oils 192

– temperature 75

– temperature gauge 75

– topping off 192

"Engine oil level" 192

Engine output, refer to Engine

data 210

Engine overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 74

Engine speed, refer to Engine

specifications 210

Engine starting, refer to

Starting engine 59

"Enter address" 122,128

Entering address 121,124

Entering destination via town/

city name 122

Entering intersection 123

Entering town/city for

navigation 122

Entering zip code for

navigation 123

"Entertainment" 140

"Entertainment

settings" 141,148

Entertainment sound output

on/off 141

Entry map for destination 125

Equalizer, refer to Tone

control 143

"Equalizer", tone control 143

"ESN" 150

ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC

Dynamic Stability

Control 86

Event Data Recorders 196

Exhaust system, refer to Hot

exhaust system 114

Exterior mirrors 52

– automatic dimming

feature 53

– automatic heating 53

– folding in and out 52

– tilting down passenger-side

mirror 53

Eye for tow-starting and

towing, refer to Tow

fitting 204

Eyes for lashing, refer to

Securing cargo 117

F

"Fader", refer to Tone

control 142

Fader, refer to Tone

control 142

Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 79

False alarms, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 36

Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 51

Fastest route for

navigation 130

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

223

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Fast forward

– CD changer 157

– CD player 157

"Fast route" for

navigation 131

"Favorites" calling up with

radio 147

Filling capacities 212

First aid, refer to First-aid

kit 203

First-aid kit 203

Flashing when locking and

unlocking, refer to Setting

acknowledgment signals 31

Flashlight, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 107

Flat tire

– Flat Tire Monitor 88

– run-flat tires 89,188

Flat Tire Monitor 88

– false alarms 88

– initializing system 88

– limits of system 88

– show chains 189

– warning lamp 89

"FM", reception

range 140,144

FM, waveband 144

Fog lamps 98

– indicator lamp 13,98

Folding into raised position

convertible top

compartment floor,

Convertible 35

Footbrake, refer to Braking

safely 115

Footwell lighting, refer to

Interior lamps 99

For specified oil grades, refer

to Approved engine oils 192

For your own safety 6

Freeway, refer to Route

criteria 130

Front airbags 90

Front passenger airbags

deactivating 91

"FTM" 89

FTM, refer to Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 88

Fuel

– average consumption 75

– display 75

– fuel specifications 183

– high-quality brands 183

– quality 183

– specifications 183

– tank capacity 182

Fuel display, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Fuel filler door 182

– releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 182

Fuel gauge 75

Fuses 201

G

Garage-door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote

control 106

Gas, refer to Average fuel

consumption 75

Gasoline

– refer to Fuel

specifications 183

– refer to Required fuel 183

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Gear changes

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 62

Gear display

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

Gearshift lever

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– manual transmission 60

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

General driving notes 114

Getting in back 51

Glass sunroof, electric,

comfort operation with

comfort access 37

Glass sunroof, electric with

raise function 40

– convenience operation 32

– moving manually 41

– remote control 30

Glove compartment 107

– rechargeable flashlight 107

GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 120

Grills, refer to Ventilation 103

Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 210

H

Handbrake 60

– indicator lamp 13,60

Handsfree system

– refer to Microphone 14

Hazard warning flashers 15

HD, refer to High Definition

Radio 148

Head airbags 90

Headlamp control,

automatic 96

Headlamp flasher 64

Headlamps

– care, refer to the Caring for

your vehicle brochure

– cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 66

– replacing bulbs 197

Head Light, refer to Adaptive

Head Light 97

Head restraints

– front 50

– removing 50

– sitting safely 47

"Head-Up Display" 94

Head-Up Display 93

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

224

Heated

– mirrors, refer to Automatic

functions 53

– rear window 102

– seats 52

– steering wheel 54

Heater 101

Heating

– exterior mirrors 53

– interior 100

– rear window 102

– residual heat 103

– seats 52

– steering wheel 54

Heating with engine switched

off, refer to Residual

heat 103

Heavy cargo, refer to Securing

cargo 117

Height, refer to

Dimensions 211

Height adjustment

– seats 48

– steering wheel 53

High-beam assistant 97

High beams 97

– headlamp flasher 97

– indicator lamp 13

– replacing bulbs 198

High Definition Radio 148

Highs, refer to Tone

control 141

High water, refer to Driving

through water 115

Hills 115

Holder for cups 109

"Home address" in

navigation 130

Homepage 4

Hood 190

Horn 10

Hotel function 33

– unlocking manually 33

Hot exhaust system 114

"Hour memo" 83

"House number" for desti-

nation entry 124

Hydraulic brake assistant,

refer to DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 86

Hydroplaning 115

– also refer to Minimum tread

depth 187

I

IBOC, refer to High Definition

Radio 148

Ice, refer to Outside temper-

ature warning 74

ID3-Tag, refer to Information

about track 155

iDrive 16

– adjusting brightness 83

– assistance window 20

– changing date and time 82

– changing language 84

– changing menu page 19

– changing settings 82

– changing unit of measure

units and display form 83

– controller 16

– controls 16

– displaying menus 17

– selecting menu item 19

– selecting or confirming

entry 19

– start menu 17

– status information 20

– symbols 18

Ignition 58

– switched off 58

– switched on 58

Ignition key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Ignition key position 1, refer to

Radio readiness 58

Ignition key position 2, refer to

Ignition on 58

Ignition lock 58

– starting engine with comfort

access 37

Indicator/warning lamps

– active steering 90

– airbags 92

– DSC 13,87

– DTC 13,87

– Flat Tire Monitor 89

– fog lamps 13,98

– handbrake 13,60

– overview 13

– safety belt warning 52

Individually programmable

buttons on steering

wheel 54

Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 29

Inflation pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 184

Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88

Information

– on another location 126

– on country 126

– on current position 126

– on destination location 126

"Information" for

navigation 126

"Information on

destination" 128

Initializing

– Flat Tire Monitor 88

– radio, refer to Storing

stations 146

– refer to Power failure 201

– seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 49

– time and date 82

"Input map" 126

Installation location

– CD changer 157

– navigation drive 120

Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice

instructions 135

Instrument cluster 12

Instrument illumination, refer

to Instrument lighting 99

Instrument lighting 99

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

225

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Instrument panel, refer to

Instrument cluster 12

Integrated key 28

Integrated universal remote

control 106

Interesting destination for

navigation 126

"Interim time" 82

Interior lamps 99

– switching on with remote

control 31

Interior motion sensor 36

– switching off 36

Interior rearview mirror 53

– automatically dimming, refer

to Automatic functions 53

Interlock on automatic

transmission 62

Intermittent wiper mode 65

J

Jacking points 200

Joystick, refer to iDrive 16

Jump starting 203

K

Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort

access 36

Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort access 36

Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 29

"Keypad" 169

Keys 28

– key-related settings, refer to

Personal Profile 29

Kick-down

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 62

Knock control 183

L

Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

low beams 96

Lamps and bulbs 197

"Languages" 84

"Languages" for

navigation 135

Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 117

Last destinations, refer to

Destination list 127

"Last seat pos." 49

LATCH child-restraint fixing

system 57

Length, refer to

Dimensions 211

License plate lamps, replacing

bulbs 200

Light-emitting diodes

LEDs 200

Lighter 110

"Lighting" 65,96

Lighting

– instruments 99

– of the vehicle, refer to

Lamps 96

– refer to High-beam

assistant 97

Light switch 96

"Limit" 81

Loading, refer to Cargo

loading 116

"Lock after driving" 32

Lock buttons in the doors,

refer to Locking 33

Locking

– from inside 33

– from outside 31

– without key, refer to Comfort

access 36

Locking and unlocking doors

– from inside 32

– from outside 30

Locking out, refer to

Unlocking 36

Locking without key, refer to

Comfort access 36

"LOGIC7", refer to Tone

control 142

Low beams 96

– automatic 96

– replacing bulbs 197

Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 48

Luggage compartment

– capacity 210

– emergency release 34

– hotel function 33

– increasing capacity,

Convertible 35

– opening/closing, refer to

Luggage compartment

lid 34

– opening from inside 34

– opening from outside 34

– opening with remote

control 31

Luggage compartment lid 34

– emergency operation 34

– emergency release 34

– opening from inside 34

– opening from outside 34

– opening with remote

control 31,34

– unlocking manually 34

Lumbar support 48

LW, waveband 144

M

M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 189

Maintenance

– refer to Service

requirements 77

– refer to the Service and

Warranty Information

Booklet for US models 195

– refer to Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models 195

Maintenance system 195

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

226

Malfunction

– convertible top 43

– door lock 32

– fuel filler door 182

– glass sunroof 41

– hotel function 33

– luggage compartment lid 34

Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 79

Manual air distribution 102

Manual mode with automatic

transmission with

Steptronic 63

"Manual" on the radio 145

Manual operation

– convertible top 43

– door lock 32

– driver's door 32

– fuel filler door 182

– glass sunroof 41

– hotel function 33

– luggage compartment lid 34

– selector lever interlock,

Automatic transmission 63

Manual transmission 60

"Map direction of travel" 134

"Map facing north" 134

Map for navigation

– changing scale 134

– destination entry 125

Map view 133

Map view facing north 133

Master key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Maximum cooling 103

Maximum speed with winter

tires 189

Memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel

memory 49

Menus, refer to iDrive 16

Microfilter 104

Microphone

– for mobile phone 14

– for voice command

system 14

Mirror dimming feature 53

Mirrors 52

– automatic curb monitor 53

– heating 53

– memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel

memory 49

"Missed calls" 168

Missed calls 168

Mobile communications

devices in vehicle 115

Mobile phone

– accepted calls 168

– adjusting volume 166

– calling 167

– ending call 167

– missed calls 168

– operation via iDrive 166

– redialing 168

– refer to separate Owner's

Manual

– Top 8 168

– touch tone dialing 169

Mobile phones

– use in vehicle, refer to Mobile

communications devices in

vehicle 115

Mobile Service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 203

Monitor, refer to iDrive 16

Monitoring pressure of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88

"Monitor on / off" 54

Most recent mobile phone

numbers 168

MP3, refer to Compressed

audio files 153

Multi-function steering wheel,

refer to Buttons on steering

wheel 11

Multifunction switch

– refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 64

– refer to Wiper/washer

system 65

"Mute on / off" 54

MW, waveband 144

N

"Navigation" 76,121

Navigation destination

– manual entry 121,124

– selecting via map 125

Navigation drive, installation

location 120

Navigation DVD 120

Navigation instructions, refer

to Switching voice instruc-

tions on/off 135

Navigation system 120

– address book 128

– bypassing route

sections 136

– destination entry 121

– destination guidance in

assistance window 120

– destination list 127

– displaying current

position 136

– entering a destination

manually 121,124

– last destinations 127

– looking for interesting

destination 126

– route display 133

– route list 134

– selecting destination using

information 126

– selecting destination via

map 125

– selecting route criteria 130

– starting 121

– starting destination

guidance 132

– switching off, refer to Termi-

nating/continuing desti-

nation guidance 132

– terminating/continuing

destination guidance 132

– voice instructions 135

– volume adjustment 135

"Navigation voice

instructions" 54

"Navigation voice instructions

on" 135

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

227

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Neck support, refer to Front

head restraints 50

"New address" for

navigation 128

"New destination" 121,125

New remote control 28

"New route" 136

New wheels and tires 188

"Next entertainment

source" 54

Nozzles

– refer to Ventilation 103

– refer to Windshield washer

nozzles 66

Nylon rope, refer to Tow-

starting and towing 204

O

OBD Socket 196

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 183

Odometer 74

Oil

– additives 192

– approved engine oils 192

– capacity 212

– consumption 191

– consumption, refer to

Engine oil, checking 191

– level 191

– topping off 192

Oil change intervals

– refer to Service

requirements 77

– refer to the Service and

Warranty Information

Booklet for US models or to

the Warranty and Service

Guide Booklet for Canadian

models

"On a new destination" for

navigation 127

"onboard info" 76

Onboard monitor, refer to

iDrive 16

Onboard tool kit 197

"On destination" 127

"On location" 127

Opening and closing

– comfort access 36

– from inside 32

– from outside 30

– using door lock 32

– using the remote control 30

Operation by voice for mobile

phone 170

– adjusting volume 171

– canceling 170

– commands 170

– correcting phone

number 171

– dialing phone number 171

– placing a call 171

– redialing 172

– voice phone book 171

"Options" 177

Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17

Output, refer to Engine

data 210

Outside air, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air

control 103

Outside temperature

display 74

– changing unit of measure 83

P

Panic mode 31

Park Distance Control PDC 85

"Parked car operation" 104

"Parked car ventilation" 104

Parked car ventilation

– activating an activation

time 105

– setting activation time 104

– switching on and off

directly 104

Parking, vehicle 59

Parking aid, refer to PDC Park

Distance Control 85

Parking assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 85

Parking brake, refer to

Handbrake 60

Parking lamps/low beams 96

– replacing bulbs 198

Parts and accessories 6

Passenger airbags, deacti-

vating, refer to Exception for

front passenger’s seat 56

Passenger-side exterior

mirror, tilting down 53

"Pathway lighting" 96

Pathway lighting 96

"PDC" 86

"PDC display on" 86

PDC Park Distance Control 85

Personal Profile 29

"Perspective" 134

"Phone" 167

Phone book 166

Phone numbers

– deleting from phone

book 169

– dialing 167

– most recent numbers 168

– selecting in phone book 168

– Top 8 168

Plasters, refer to First-aid

kit 203

"Play" in audio mode 154

"Play" on the radio,

selecting 151

Plug-in unit for remote

control, refer to Ignition

lock 58

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 104

Position

– displaying 136

– storing 128

Power failure 201

Power windows, refer to

Windows 38

"Presets" on the

radio 144,150

Presetting parked car venti-

lation activation times 104

Pressure, tires 184

"Profile" 177

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

228

Programmable buttons on

steering wheel 54

Protective function, refer to

Anti-trapping mechanism

– glass sunroof 40

– windows 39

R

Radio

– Autostore 145

– controls 140

– High Definition Radio 148

– playing stations 145

– satellite radio 149

– selecting frequency

manually 145

– selecting

waveband 140,144

– station search 145

– station selection 144

– station with best

reception 145

– storing stations 146

– switching on/off 140

– tone control 141

– volume 141

– Weather Band, refer to

Weather news flashes 147

Radio key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28

Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 58

Radio readiness 58

– switched off 58

– switched on 58

– with comfort access 37

Rain sensor, windshield

washer system 65

"Random", random play

sequence, selecting 156

"Random all" in audio

mode 156

"Random directory" in audio

mode 156

Random play sequence

– CD changer 156

– CD player 156

"RDS" 147

Reading lamps 99

Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 199

Rearview mirrors, refer to

Mirrors 52

Rear window

– heating 102

– opening and closing 39

"Received calls" 168

Reception

– quality 147

– radio stations 147

– regional station 145

Reception quality of mobile

phone, refer to Status

information 20

Rechargeable flashlight 107

Recirculated-air mode, refer

to AUC Automatic recircu-

lated-air control 103

Recirculation of air, refer to

AUC Automatic recircu-

lated-air control 103

Reclining seat, refer to

Backrest 48

Recording times, refer to

Stopwatch 81

"Redial" for mobile phone 168

Reflectors, refer to Tail

lamps 199

Refueling 182

Releasing, hood 190

"Relock door if not

opened" 32

Remaining distance, refer to

Remaining range 75

Remaining distance to desti-

nation, refer to Computer 76

Remaining range 75

Remote control 28

– battery replacement 38

– comfort access 36

– garage-door opener 106

– luggage compartment lid 31

– malfunction 31,37

Removing condensation from

windows 102

"Repeat directory" in audio

mode 156

"Repeat" in audio mode 156

"Repeat track" in audio

mode 156

Replacement fuses 201

Replacing bulbs, refer to

Lamps and bulbs 197

Replacing tires

– changing a wheel 200

– new wheels and tires 188

Reporting an accident, refer to

Initiating emergency

call 202

Reporting safety defects 7

Required fuel 183

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 75

Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 143

"Reset" for stopwatch 81

"Reset" tone settings 143

Residual heat 103

Restraint systems

– for children 56

– refer to Safety belts 51

Retreaded tires 188

Reverse, fast

– CD changer 157

– CD player 157

Reverse gear

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– manual transmission 61

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

Road map 133

"Roadside

Assistance" 176,178

Roadside Assistance 203

Roadside parking lamps 97

– replacing bulbs, refer to

Parking lamps 198

Rollover protection system on

Convertible 92

– lowering 93

Rope, refer to Tow-starting

and towing 204

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

229

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Rotary fuel controller, refer to

iDrive 16

Route 130

– bypassing sections 136

– changing 130,136

– display 133

– displaying arrow display 133

– displaying map 133

– displaying towns/cities and

streets 134

– list 134

– selecting 130

– selecting criteria 130

Route map, refer to Map

view 133

"Route preference",

changing 130

Route selection 130

Run-flat tires 188

– continuing driving with a

damaged tire 89

– flat tire 89

– tire inflation pressure 184

– tire replacement 188

– winter tires 188

S

Safety belts 51

– damage 52

– indicator lamp 52

– sitting safely 47

Safety belt tensioners, refer to

Safety belts 51

Safety systems

– ABS Antilock Brake

System 86

– airbags 90

– DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

– rollover protection system,

Convertible 92

– safety belts 51

Satellite radio 149

– enabling channels 150

– selecting channel 150

– storing channel 150

"SAT" on the radio 140,150

"Save current

destination" 130

"Scan"

– playing a music track 155

– playing stations 145

Scan

– CD changer 155

– CD player 155

– radio 145

"Scan all" in audio mode 155

"Scan directory" in audio

mode 155

Screw thread for tow

fitting 205

SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 149

Seats 48

– adjusting 48

– heating 52

– lumbar support 48

– memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel

memory 49

– sitting safely 47

– sports seat 48

– storing the setting 49

– thigh support 48

Securing cargo 117

– ski bag 111

Securing load, refer to

Securing cargo 117

– ski bag 111

"Select as destination" 127

"Select current speed" 81

Selecting audio sources, refer

to Operating via iDrive 140

Selecting distance for active

cruise control 69

Selecting frequency

manually 145

Selecting menu items 19

Selecting new scale for

navigation system

display 134

Selecting route 130

Selection options with

navigation system 130

Selector lever

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– manual transmission 60

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

Selector lever interlock, refer

to Shiftlock

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

Sequential Manual Gearbox

SMG 61

"Service" 77,175,191

Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 203

Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US

models 195

Service interval display, refer

to Service requirements 77

"Service notification" 175

"Service Request" 176,178

"Service

requirements" 78,175,192

Service requirements 77

– also refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 195

"Service Status" 175

"Set date" 83

"Set" in audio mode 140

"Set" in trip computer 77

"Set service date" 78

"Set time" 82

Settings

– changing on Control

Display 82

– clock, 12h/24h mode 83

– configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 29

Setting speed limit 81

Setting time, refer to Prese-

lecting activation time 104

"Set tire pressure" 89

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

230

Shifting

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 62

Shifting paddles 62

Shiftlock

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

Short commands of voice

command system 213

"Short route" for

navigation 131

Short route in navigation, refer

to Selecting route 130

"Show current position" 126

"Show destination

position" 126

Side airbags 90

Side marker lamps, replacing

bulbs 199

Side turn signals, replacing

bulbs 199

Signal horn, refer to Horn 10

Sill panel lighting, refer to

Interior lamps 99

Sitting safely 47

– with airbags 47

– with head restraints 47

– with safety belts 47

Ski bag 110

Sliding/tilt roof, refer to Glass

sunroof, electric with raise

function 40

Slope assistant, refer to

Starting assistant 115

SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

– acceleration assistant 64

– breaking-in 114

– Dynamic Driving Control 64

– gear display 61

– kick-down 62

– shiftlock 61

– towing 205

– tow-starting 206

Snow chains 189

Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 110

Socket for Onboard

Diagnostics interface 196

Socket for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 58

Song search with CD, refer to

Playing a track 155

SOS, refer to Initiating an

emergency call 202

Spare fuses 201

Spare key 28

– adapter 28

Spare remote control 28

Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 192

Speed-dependent

volume 142

Speed limit 81

Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 81

Speedometer 12

"Speed volume", tone

control 142

Speed with winter tires 189

Sport program

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 63

– refer to Dynamic Driving

Control 64

Stability control, refer to

Driving stability control

systems 86

"Star button" 54

Start/Stop button 58

"Start" for stopwatch 81

"Start guidance" 124,132

Starting assistant 115

Starting difficulties

– jump starting 203

– refer to Special starting

conditions 59

Starting engine 59

Starting off on slopes, refer to

Starting assistant 115

Start menu, iDrive 17

"Start route guidance" 126

"Start service" 176

"State / Province" for desti-

nation entry 122

"State inspection" 78

Station, refer to Radio 144

"Status" 78

Status information on Control

Display 20

Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5

Steering wheel

– adjustment 53

– automatic adjustment, refer

to Easy entry/exit 53

– buttons on steering

wheel 11

– heating 54

– lock 58

– locking 58

– memory 49

– programmable buttons 54

"Steering wheel buttons" 54

Steering-wheel shift buttons,

refer to Shift paddles 62

Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 90

Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with

Steptronic 62

"Stop" for stopwatch 81

"Stopwatch" 81

Stopwatch 81

Storage compartments 108

"Store in address book" for

navigation 128

"Store" on the radio 146,151

Storing current position 128

Storing radio stations 146

Storing sitting position, refer

to Seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 49

Storing tires 189

Straps, refer to Loading 117

"Street" for destination

entry 123

Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 184

SW, waveband 144

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

231

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

Switches, refer to Cockpit 10

Switching between high

beams and low beams,

automatic, refer to High-

beam assistant 97

Switching off engine 59

Switching off the tilt alarm

sensor 36

Switching on

– audio 140

– CD changer 140

– CD player 140

– radio 140

Switching the cooling function

on and off 102

Swiveling headlamps, refer to

Adaptive Head Light 97

Symbols 4

– indicator and warning

lamps 13

T

Tachometer 74

Tail lamps 199

– replacing bulbs 199

Tank capacity

– also refer to Filling

capacities 212

– fuel tank capacity 182

Target cursor for

navigation 126

Technical alterations, refer to

For your own safety 6

Technical data 210

Telematic, refer to

TeleService, BMW

Assist 174

Telephone

– refer to Mobile phone 162

– refer to separate Owner’s

Manual

"Telephone list" 54

TeleService 174

– enabling 174

– services offered 175

Temperature

– adjusting in upper body

region 102

– adjusting with automatic

climate control 101

– of coolant, refer to Coolant

temperature 74

Temperature display

– changing units of

measure 83

– outside temperature 74

– temperature warning 74

Temperature gauge, engine

oil 75

Temperature warning 74

Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 66

"Terminate services" 177

"Text language" 84

"Theater", refer to Tone

control 142

The individual vehicle 5

Tie-down points, refer to

Securing cargo 117

Tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 53

"Time" 82

"Time format" 83

Timer, refer to Preselecting

activation time 104

"Timer 1" for parked car

ventilation 105

"Timer 2" for parked car

ventilation 105

Tire Quality Grading 186

Tires

– age 186

– air loss 89

– breaking-in 114

– condition 187

– damage 187

– inflation pressure 184

– minimum tread depth 187

– Monitoring inflation

pressure, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 88

– new wheels and tires 188

– replacing 188

– retreaded tires 188

– run-flat tires 188

– size 185

– size, refer to The right

wheels and tires 188

– wear indicators 187

– wheel/tire combination 188

– winter tires 189

Tires with run-flat properties,

refer to Run-flat tires

– continuing to drive with a

damaged tire 89

– flat tire 89

– new wheels and tires 188

"Tone" 141

Tone in audio mode

– adjusting 141

– middle setting 143

Tools, refer to Onboard tool

kit 197

top 41

"Top 8" for mobile phone 168

Torque, refer to Engine

specifications 210

Touch tone dialing 169

Tow fitting 204

Towing 204

– tow fitting 204

"Town / City" for destination

entry 122

Tow-starting 204,206

Tracks

– finding 155

– random play sequence 156

– sample, Scan 155

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z

232

Track width, refer to

Dimensions 211

Traction-assist feature, refer

to DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

Traction control, refer to DSC

Dynamic Stability

Control 86

Traffic congestion, refer to

Bypassing route

sections 136

Transmission

– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 62

– deactivating selector lever

interlock on automatic

transmission with

Steptronic 63

– manual transmission 60

– SMG Sequential Manual

Gearbox 61

– starting assistant 115

Transporting children

safely 56

Transport securing device,

refer to Securing cargo 117

Tread depth, refer to Minimum

tread depth 187

Treble, refer to Tone

control 141

"Treble", tone control 142

"Trip computer" 77

Trip computer 76

Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 74

"Triple turn signal

activation" 65

Trip odometer 74

Trunk, refer to Luggage

compartment 35

Trunk lid, refer to Luggage

compartment lid 34

Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 211

Turn signals 64

– replacing bulbs 198

U

Undercarriage protection,

refer to the Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQR 186

"Units" 83

Units

– average fuel

consumption 83

– temperature 83

Universal garage-door

opener, refer to Integrated

universal remote

control 106

Universal remote control, refer

to Integrated universal

remote control 106

"Unlock button" 30

Unlocking

– from inside 33

– from outside 30

– without key, refer to Comfort

access 36

Unlocking and locking doors,

setting confirmation

signals 31

Unlocking without key, refer to

Comfort access 36

"Update services" 177

"Use current location as

address" 129,130

Used batteries

– refer to Disposal 200

– refer to Replacing battery 38

V

Vehicle

– battery 200

– breaking-in 114

– care, refer to the Caring for

your vehicle brochure

– cargo loading 116

– dimensions 211

– parking 59

– washing, refer to the Caring

for your vehicle brochure

– weights 210

Vehicle jack 200

– jacking points 200

Vehicle position, refer to

Displaying current

position 136

"Vehicle settings" when

unlocking 30

Ventilation 103

– draft-free 104

– for cooling 104

– parked car ventilation 104

Vent outlets of automatic

climate control 100

"Vent settings" 102

Voice, refer to Destination

guidance with voice

instructions 135

Voice command system 22

– short commands 213

Voice instructions for

navigation system 135

– muting 55

– repeating 55,135

– switching on/off 55,135

– volume 135

Voice phone book 171

Volume 140

– audio sources 140

– mobile phone 166

– setting speed-

dependent 142

– voice instructions 135

Volume adjustment in audio

mode, front-to-rear 142

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

233

At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility

W

Warning lamps, refer to

Indicator/warning lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 79

Warning triangle 202

Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian

models 195

Washer fluid

– capacity of the reservoir 66

– wiper system 66

Washer fluid reservoir 66

Water on roads, refer to

Driving through water 115

Waveband for radio 144

"WB" 140,148

Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 187

Weather news flashes 147

Website 4

Weights 210

Wheel/tire combination, refer

to New wheels and tires 188

Wheel/tire damage 187

Wheel/tire replacement, refer

to New wheels and tires 188

Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 211

Wheels and tires 184

Width, refer to

Dimensions 211

Wind deflector 45

Windows 38

– comfort operation with

comfort access 37

– convenience

operation 30,32

– opening and closing,

Convertible 38

– opening and closing,

Coupe 38

– rear window, Convertible 39

Windshield

– cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 66

– defrosting, refer to

Defrosting windows 102

– displays, refer to Head-Up

Display 93

Windshield washer nozzles 66

Windshield washer system,

refer to Washer/wiper

system 65

Windshield wiper blade

replacement 197

Windshield wipers, refer to

Wiper/washer system 65

Winter tires 189

– setting speed limit 81

– storage 189

Wiper blade replacement 197

Wiper system 65

– rain sensor 65

– washer fluid 66

– windshield washer

nozzles 66

"With highways" for

navigation 131

Word matching principle for

navigation 131

Working in the engine

compartment 190

Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer

to Onboard tool kit 197

X

Xenon lamps 197

– replacing bulbs 197

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Refueling

To ensure that you always have all the essential

data on hand when refueling, we recommend

that you fill in the following tables with the spec-

ifications and information that apply to your

vehicle. Consult the index for individual specifi-

cations.

Fuel

Engine oil

Tire inflation pressures

Designation

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Quality

Summer tires

Front Rear

Winter tires

Front Rear

Up to 2 persons

4 persons or 4 persons plus luggage

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

01 41 0 159 709 ue

*BL015970900J*

The Ultimate

Driving Machine

More about BMW

bmwusa.com

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG